Systems and methods for retinal imaging and tracking

ABSTRACT

A head mounted display system configured to project light to an eye of a user to display augmented reality images can include a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user, a camera disposed temporally on said frame, an eyepiece configured to direct light into said user&#39;s eye to display augmented reality image content to the user&#39;s vision field, a reflective element disposed on the frame, and at least one VCSEL disposed to illuminate said eye, wherein the camera is disposed with respect to the reflective element such that light from the VCSEL is reflected from the user&#39;s eye to the reflective element and is reflected from the reflective element to the camera to form images of the eye that are captured by the camera.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.17/207,381, filed Mar. 19, 2021, which claims the benefit of U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/992,858, filed Mar. 20, 2020, which arehereby incorporated by reference in their entireties. The disclosures ofU.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/138,228, filed on Sep. 21, 2018,entitled “AUGMENTED REALITY DISPLAY WITH WAVEGUIDE CONFIGURED TO CAPTUREIMAGES OF EYE AND/OR ENVIRONMENT”; U.S. patent application Ser. No.15/271,802, filed on Sep. 21, 2016, entitled “EYE IMAGING WITH AN OFFAXIS IMAGER”, now U.S. Patent No. 10,466,478 issued on Nov. 5, 2019;U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/902,927, filed on Feb. 22, 2018,entitled “VARIABLE-FOCUS VIRTUAL IMAGE DEVICES BASED ON POLARIZATIONCONVERSION”; and International Patent Application No. PCT/US2019/053026,filed on Sep. 25, 2019, entitled “EYEWEAR WITH PINHOLE AND SLITCAMERAS”, are each hereby incorporated by reference herein in theirentireties.

BACKGROUND Field

The present disclosure relates to optical devices, including augmentedreality imaging and visualization systems.

Description of the Related Art

Modern computing and display technologies have facilitated thedevelopment of systems for so called “virtual reality” or “augmentedreality” experiences, in which digitally reproduced images or portionsthereof are presented to a user in a manner wherein they seem to be, ormay be perceived as, real. A virtual reality, or “VR”, scenariotypically involves the presentation of digital or virtual imageinformation without transparency to other actual real-world visualinput; an augmented reality, or “AR”, scenario typically involvespresentation of digital or virtual image information as an augmentationto visualization of the actual world around the user. A mixed reality,or “MR”, scenario is a type of AR scenario and typically involvesvirtual objects that are integrated into, and responsive to, the naturalworld. For example, an MR scenario may include AR image content thatappears to be blocked by or is otherwise perceived to interact withobjects in the real world.

Referring to FIG. 1 , an augmented reality scene 10 is depicted. Theuser of an AR technology sees a real-world park-like setting 20featuring people, trees, buildings in the background, and a concreteplatform 30. The user also perceives that he/she “sees” “virtualcontent” such as a robot statue 40 standing upon the real-world platform30, and a flying cartoon-like avatar character 50 which seems to be apersonification of a bumble bee. These elements 50, 40 are “virtual” inthat they do not exist in the real world. Because the human visualperception system is complex, it is challenging to produce AR technologythat facilitates a comfortable, natural-feeling, rich presentation ofvirtual image elements amongst other virtual or real-world imageryelements.

Systems and methods disclosed herein address various challenges relatedto AR and VR technology.

Polarizing beam splitters may be used in display systems to directpolarized light to light modulators and then to direct this light to aviewer. There is a continuing demand to reduce the sizes of displaysystems generally and, as a result, there is also a demand to reduce thesizes of the constituent parts of the display systems, includingconstituent parts utilizing polarizing beam splitters.

SUMMARY

Various implementations described herein include display systemsconfigured to provide illumination and/or image projection to the eye.Additionally or alternatively, the display systems can image the eyeand/or the environment.

In some embodiments, a head mounted display system is configured toproject light to an eye of a user to display augmented reality imagecontent in a vision field of said user. The head-mounted display systemcan include a frame that is configured to be supported on a head of theuser. The display system can also include an image projector that isconfigured to project images into the user's eye to display imagecontent in the vision field of the user. The display system can includea camera, at least one waveguide, at least one coupling optical elementthat is configured such that light is coupled into said waveguide andguided therein, and at least one out-coupling element. The at least oneout-coupling element can be configured to couple light that is guidedwithin said waveguide out of said waveguide and direct said light tosaid camera. The camera can be disposed in an optical path with respectto said at least one out-coupling optical element to receive at least aportion of the light that is coupled into said waveguide via thecoupling element and guided therein and that is coupled out from saidwaveguide by said out-coupling coupling element such that images may becaptured by said camera.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 illustrates a user's view of augmented reality (AR) through an ARdevice.

FIG. 2 illustrates an example of wearable display system.

FIG. 3 illustrates a conventional display system for simulatingthree-dimensional imagery for a user.

FIG. 4 illustrates aspects of an approach for simulatingthree-dimensional imagery using multiple depth planes.

FIGS. 5A-5C illustrate relationships between radius of curvature andfocal radius.

FIG. 6 illustrates an example of a waveguide stack for outputting imageinformation to a user.

FIG. 7 illustrates an example of exit beams outputted by a waveguide.

FIG. 8 illustrates an example of a stacked waveguide assembly in whicheach depth plane includes images formed using multiple differentcomponent colors.

FIG. 9A illustrates a cross-sectional side view of an example of a setof stacked waveguides that each includes an incoupling optical element.As discuss herein, the stack of waveguide may comprise an eyepiece.

FIG. 9B illustrates a perspective view of an example of the plurality ofstacked waveguides of FIG. 9A.

FIG. 9C illustrates a top-down plan view of an example of the pluralityof stacked waveguides of FIGS. 9A and 9B.

FIG. 10 schematically illustrates a cross-sectional side view of anexample imaging system comprising an eyepiece, an image projector, alight source for illuminating the eye, and a camera for capturing animage of the eye.

FIG. 11A schematically illustrates the light source for illuminating theeye and the image projector for injecting images in the eye bothemitting light toward an incoupling optical element on a waveguide ofthe eyepiece.

FIG. 11B schematically illustrates projected light from the light sourceand from the image projector coupled into the waveguide.

FIG. 11C schematically illustrates how incoupled light may propagatethrough a waveguide by total internal reflection.

FIG. 11D schematically illustrates light from the light source and fromthe image projector coupled out of the eyepiece.

FIG. 11E schematically illustrates the waveguide and coupling opticalelement configured to propagate incoupled light at least along a fulldimension (e.g., along the x-direction) of the coupling optical element.Light entering the eye is shown from an extended source (e.g., theimaging light will capture a region of the retina).

FIG. 12A is a cross-sectional view that schematically shows lightreflected from the retina exiting the eye and incident on the eyepiece.

FIG. 12B schematically illustrates the example light coupled into thewaveguide of the eyepiece.

FIG. 12C schematically illustrates collimated incoupled light from theeye propagating through a waveguide toward an imaging device.

FIG. 12D schematically shows incoupled light from the eye propagating tothe one or more outcoupling optical elements.

FIG. 12E schematically illustrates light from the eye coupled out of thewaveguide by the outcoupling optical element and directed to the cameraso that an image of the eye (e.g., the retina) can be captured by thecamera.

FIG. 13A schematically illustrates how the imaging system can imagevarious portions of the eye, for example, of the retina, which canenable the orientation of the eye to be determined and the eye positiontracked.

FIG. 13B illustrates a pattern of sequentially displayed fixationtargets used to cause the eye to be directed in a variety of differentdirections during which the retina is imaged. The resultant imagescorrespond to non-identical portions of the retina. For example, whenthe eye is directed in various directions to view differently locatedfixation targets on the display, images captured by the camera includedifferent portions of the retina. These images can be assembled to forma larger map or composite image of the retina.

FIG. 14A schematically illustrates a cross-sectional view of an imagingsystem comprising an eyepiece and a camera for collecting light from theenvironment forward the eyepiece. Light from the environment is shownreflected off or emitted from one or more physical objects in theenvironment. Collection of light from objects in the environment infront of the eyepiece can enable images of the environment to becaptured.

FIG. 14B schematically illustrates light from the environment beingcoupled by the coupling optical element into a waveguide of theeyepiece.

FIG. 14C schematically illustrates an imaging system for collectinglight from the environment using a powered optical element, such as arefractive optical element (e.g., lens such as a wide field of viewlens), forward the eyepiece.

FIG. 15A schematically illustrates an example imaging system comprisinga polarization selective incoupling optical element for receiving lighta illumination source and coupling the light into a waveguide in aneyepiece. The eyepiece further includes a polarization selective lightcoupling element for coupling light out of the waveguide. A polarizermay be used to polarize the light from the illumination source and ahalf wave retarder may be used to rotate the orientation of the linearlypolarized light so as to be turned into the waveguide by thepolarization selective incoupling optical element.

FIG. 15B schematically illustrates light from the eye (e.g., from theretina illuminated with infrared light from the illumination source)being coupled back into the waveguide and directed to a camera for imagecapture.

FIG. 16 schematically illustrates an imaging system configured forimaging an anterior portion (e.g., cornea) of an eye. The imaging systemcomprises an eyepiece such as described above. The imaging systemfurther includes a positive lens for collimating light collect from theanterior portion of the eye for coupling via an optical coupling elementinto a waveguide and propagation to a camera for image capture. Thesystem further comprises a negative lens to offset the positive powerintroduced by the positive lens and to prevent inversion of images ofthe environment in front of the eyepiece that would otherwise be causedby the positive lens.

FIG. 17 schematically illustrates another example imaging systemconfigured for imaging an anterior portion (e.g., cornea) of an eye. Theimaging system comprises a curved wavelength selective reflector thatcollimates light from the anterior portion of the eye for coupling viaan optical coupling element into a waveguide and propagation to a camerafor image capture. The wavelength selective reflector may operate inreflection for infrared light reflected from the eye and in transmissionfor visible light from the environment in front of the user.

FIG. 18 schematically illustrates an example imaging system that alsoincludes a curved wavelength selective reflector that collimates lightfrom the anterior portion of the eye for coupling via an opticalcoupling element into a waveguide and propagation to a camera for imagecapture. Polarization selectivity may be employed to assist incontrolling the path of the light reflected from the eye. Illuminationof the eye is provided via the waveguide instead of a plurality of lightsource between the waveguide and the eye as shown in FIG. 18 .

FIG. 19 schematically illustrates an imaging system that includes ashutter to assist in a procedure for subtracting out noise.

FIGS. 20A-20E schematically illustrate an alternative procedure forsubtracting out noise using wavelength modulation in conjunction with acurved wavelength selective reflector.

FIG. 21 shows an example eyepiece that can be used to simultaneouslyproject light into a user's eye to provide image content thereto whilereceiving image data of the user's eye or of the environment in front ofthe user.

FIG. 22 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of an example of acholesteric liquid crystal diffraction grating (CLCG) having a pluralityof uniform chiral structures.

FIG. 23 illustrates an example of an imaging system comprising aforward-facing camera configured to images a wearer's eye using acholesteric liquid crystal (CLC) off-axis mirror.

FIGS. 24A-24F illustrate examples of imaging systems comprising aforward-facing camera configured to images a wearer's eye using a CLCoff-axis mirror.

FIGS. 24G and 24H illustrate examples of imaging systems comprising aforward-facing camera configured to images a wearer's eye using adiffractive optical element comprising a plurality of segments includingone more CLC off-axis mirrors, where each of the segments can havedifferent optical properties.

FIG. 25A schematically shows an example illumination system thatincludes a plurality of reflective elements.

FIG. 25B schematically shows another example illumination system thatincludes a plurality of reflective elements where a first reflectiveelement is nearer the eye than a second reflective element.

FIG. 26 schematically shows another example illumination system thatincludes a plurality of cameras.

FIG. 27A shows an example illumination system that includes a VCSELarray coupled to a camera.

FIG. 27B shows an example illumination system that includes a VCSELarray coupled to a reflective element.

FIG. 28A shows an example arrangement of an illumination system thatinclude a reflective diffractive optical element and a focusing opticalelement.

FIG. 28B shows an example arrangement of an illumination system thatinclude a transmissive diffractive optical element and a focusingoptical element.

FIG. 29 schematically illustrates an example configuration for capturingimages of the retina of an eye usable for determining the location ofpupil center of the eye with respect to a coordinate system of thecamera.

FIG. 30 schematically illustrates an example configuration for capturingimages of the retina of an eye from different perspectives fordetermining the three-dimensional location of pupil center of the eyeusing two cameras for capturing the images.

FIG. 31 is a flow diagram showing an example method for calculating thecoordinates of a center of mass of a portion of a retina image capturedby a camera.

FIG. 32A illustrates an example of an image of a portion of the retinaprojected on an image sensor.

FIG. 32B shows an example of calibrated retinal map.

FIG. 32C illustrates the image of a portion of the retina (shown in FIG.32A) where a blood vessel pattern is identified.

FIG. 32D illustrates the image of a portion of the retina containingblood vessels (shown in FIG. 32C) where a bounding region, e.g., polygonor minimal polygon, has been defined around the blood vessels.

FIG. 33A schematically illustrates a coordinate system of an eyeballdefined based on the eyeball center and pupil center when the eye is ain a neutral orientation.

FIG. 33B schematically illustrates the angular coordinates of the pupilcenter in the coordinate system defined in FIG. 33A, when the eyeball isnot in a neutral orientation.

FIG. 33C shows the relative position of the pupil center (B) withrespect to eyeball center (A) for three different gaze directions.

FIG. 34 is a flow diagram showing an example method that may be used togenerate a gaze direction mapping matrix for an eye.

The drawings are provided to illustrate example embodiments and are notintended to limit the scope of the disclosure. Like reference numeralsrefer to like parts throughout.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Reference will now be made to the figures, in which like referencenumerals refer to like parts throughout.

FIG. 2 illustrates an example of wearable display system 60. The displaysystem 60 includes a display 70, and various mechanical and electronicmodules and systems to support the functioning of that display 70. Thedisplay 70 may be coupled to a frame 80, which is wearable by a displaysystem user or viewer 90 and which is configured to position the display70 in front of the eyes of the user 90. The display 70 may be consideredeyewear in some embodiments. In some embodiments, a speaker 100 iscoupled to the frame 80 and configured to be positioned adjacent the earcanal of the user 90 (in some embodiments, another speaker, not shown,may optionally be positioned adjacent the other ear canal of the user toprovide stereo/shapeable sound control). The display system may alsoinclude one or more microphones 110 or other devices to detect sound. Insome embodiments, the microphone is configured to allow the user toprovide inputs or commands to the system 60 (e.g., the selection ofvoice menu commands, natural language questions, etc.), and/or may allowaudio communication with other persons (e.g., with other users ofsimilar display systems. The microphone may further be configured as aperipheral sensor to collect audio data (e.g., sounds from the userand/or environment). In some embodiments, the display system may alsoinclude a peripheral sensor 120 a, which may be separate from the frame80 and attached to the body of the user 90 (e.g., on the head, torso, anextremity, etc. of the user 90). The peripheral sensor 120 a may beconfigured to acquire data characterizing a physiological state of theuser 90 in some embodiments. For example, the sensor 120 a may be anelectrode.

With continued reference to FIG. 2 , the display 70 is operativelycoupled by communications link 130, such as by a wired lead or wirelessconnectivity, to a local data processing module 140 which may be mountedin a variety of configurations, such as fixedly attached to the frame80, fixedly attached to a helmet or hat worn by the user, embedded inheadphones, or otherwise removably attached to the user 90 (e.g., in abackpack-style configuration, in a belt-coupling style configuration).Similarly, the sensor 120 a may be operatively coupled by communicationslink 120 b, e.g., a wired lead or wireless connectivity, to the localprocessor and data module 140. The local processing and data module 140may comprise a hardware processor, as well as digital memory, such asnon-volatile memory (e.g., flash memory or hard disk drives), both ofwhich may be utilized to assist in the processing, caching, and storageof data. The data include data a) captured from sensors (which may be,e.g., operatively coupled to the frame 80 or otherwise attached to theuser 90), such as image capture devices (such as cameras), microphones,inertial measurement units, accelerometers, compasses, GPS units, radiodevices, gyros, and/or other sensors disclosed herein; and/or b)acquired and/or processed using remote processing module 150 and/orremote data repository 160 (including data relating to virtual content),possibly for passage to the display 70 after such processing orretrieval. The local processing and data module 140 may be operativelycoupled by communication links 170, 180, such as via a wired or wirelesscommunication links, to the remote processing module 150 and remote datarepository 160 such that these remote modules 150, 160 are operativelycoupled to each other and available as resources to the local processingand data module 140. In some embodiments, the local processing and datamodule 140 may include one or more of the image capture devices,microphones, inertial measurement units, accelerometers, compasses, GPSunits, radio devices, and/or gyros. In some other embodiments, one ormore of these sensors may be attached to the frame 80, or may bestandalone structures that communicate with the local processing anddata module 140 by wired or wireless communication pathways.

With continued reference to FIG. 2 , in some embodiments, the remoteprocessing module 150 may comprise one or more processors configured toanalyze and process data and/or image information. In some embodiments,the remote data repository 160 may comprise a digital data storagefacility, which may be available through the internet or othernetworking configuration in a “cloud” resource configuration. In someembodiments, the remote data repository 160 may include one or moreremote servers, which provide information, e.g., information forgenerating augmented reality content, to the local processing and datamodule 140 and/or the remote processing module 150. In some embodiments,all data is stored and all computations are performed in the localprocessing and data module, allowing fully autonomous use from a remotemodule.

With reference now to FIG. 3 , the perception of an image as being“three-dimensional” or “3-D” may be achieved by providing slightlydifferent presentations of the image to each eye of the viewer. FIG. 3illustrates a conventional display system for simulatingthree-dimensional imagery for a user. Two distinct images 190, 200—onefor each eye 210, 220—are outputted to the user. The images 190, 200 arespaced from the eyes 210, 220 by a distance 230 along an optical orz-axis that is parallel to the line of sight of the viewer. The images190, 200 are flat and the eyes 210, 220 may focus on the images byassuming a single accommodated state. Such 3-D display systems rely onthe human visual system to combine the images 190, 200 to provide aperception of depth and/or scale for the combined image.

It will be appreciated, however, that the human visual system is morecomplicated and providing a realistic perception of depth is morechallenging. For example, many viewers of conventional “3-D” displaysystems find such systems to be uncomfortable or may not perceive asense of depth at all. Without being limited by theory, it is believedthat viewers of an object may perceive the object as being“three-dimensional” due to a combination of vergence and accommodation.Vergence movements (i.e., rotation of the eyes so that the pupils movetoward or away from each other to converge the lines of sight of theeyes to fixate upon an object) of the two eyes relative to each otherare closely associated with focusing (or “accommodation”) of the lensesand pupils of the eyes. Under normal conditions, changing the focus ofthe lenses of the eyes, or accommodating the eyes, to change focus fromone object to another object at a different distance will automaticallycause a matching change in vergence to the same distance, under arelationship known as the “accommodation-vergence reflex,” as well aspupil dilation or constriction. Likewise, a change in vergence willtrigger a matching change in accommodation of lens shape and pupil size,under normal conditions. As noted herein, many stereoscopic or “3-D”display systems display a scene using slightly different presentations(and, so, slightly different images) to each eye such that athree-dimensional perspective is perceived by the human visual system.Such systems are uncomfortable for many viewers, however, since they,among other things, simply provide different presentations of a scene,but with the eyes viewing all the image information at a singleaccommodated state, and work against the “accommodation-vergencereflex.” Display systems that provide a better match betweenaccommodation and vergence may form more realistic and comfortablesimulations of three-dimensional imagery.

FIG. 4 illustrates aspects of an approach for simulatingthree-dimensional imagery using multiple depth planes. With reference toFIG. 4 , objects at various distances from eyes 210, 220 on the z-axisare accommodated by the eyes 210, 220 so that those objects are infocus. The eyes 210, 220 assume particular accommodated states to bringinto focus objects at different distances along the z-axis.Consequently, a particular accommodated state may be said to beassociated with a particular one of depth planes 240, with has anassociated focal distance, such that objects or parts of objects in aparticular depth plane are in focus when the eye is in the accommodatedstate for that depth plane. In some embodiments, three-dimensionalimagery may be simulated by providing different presentations of animage for each of the eyes 210, 220, and also by providing differentpresentations of the image corresponding to each of the depth planes.While shown as being separate for clarity of illustration, it will beappreciated that the fields of view of the eyes 210, 220 may overlap,for example, as distance along the z-axis increases. In addition, whileshown as flat for ease of illustration, it will be appreciated that thecontours of a depth plane may be curved in physical space, such that allfeatures in a depth plane are in focus with the eye in a particularaccommodated state.

The distance between an object and the eye 210 or 220 may also changethe amount of divergence of light from that object, as viewed by thateye. FIGS. 5A-5C illustrate relationships between distance and thedivergence of light rays. The distance between the object and the eye210 is represented by, in order of decreasing distance, R1, R2, and R3.As shown in FIGS. 5A-5C, the light rays become more divergent asdistance to the object decreases. As distance increases, the light raysbecome more collimated. Stated another way, it may be said that thelight field produced by a point (the object or a part of the object) hasa spherical wavefront curvature, which is a function of how far away thepoint is from the eye of the user. The curvature increases withdecreasing distance between the object and the eye 210. Consequently, atdifferent depth planes, the degree of divergence of light rays is alsodifferent, with the degree of divergence increasing with decreasingdistance between depth planes and the viewer's eye 210. While only asingle eye 210 is illustrated for clarity of illustration in FIGS. 5A-5Cand other figures herein, it will be appreciated that the discussionsregarding eye 210 may be applied to both eyes 210 and 220 of a viewer.

Without being limited by theory, it is believed that the human eyetypically can interpret a finite number of depth planes to provide depthperception. Consequently, a highly believable simulation of perceiveddepth may be achieved by providing, to the eye, different presentationsof an image corresponding to each of these limited number of depthplanes. The different presentations may be separately focused by theviewer's eyes, thereby helping to provide the user with depth cues basedon the accommodation of the eye required to bring into focus differentimage features for the scene located on different depth plane and/orbased on observing different image features on different depth planesbeing out of focus.

FIG. 6 illustrates an example of a waveguide stack for outputting imageinformation to a user. A display system 250 includes a stack ofwaveguides, or stacked waveguide assembly, 260 that may be utilized toprovide three-dimensional perception to the eye/brain using a pluralityof waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310. In some embodiments, the displaysystem 250 is the system 60 of FIG. 2 , with FIG. 6 schematicallyshowing some parts of that system 60 in greater detail. For example, thewaveguide assembly 260 may be part of the display 70 of FIG. 2 . It willbe appreciated that the display system 250 may be considered a lightfield display in some embodiments. In addition, the waveguide assembly260 may also be referred to as an eyepiece.

With continued reference to FIG. 6 , the waveguide assembly 260 may alsoinclude a plurality of features 320, 330, 340, 350 between thewaveguides. In some embodiments, the features 320, 330, 340, 350 may beone or more lenses. The waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310 and/or theplurality of lenses 320, 330, 340, 350 may be configured to send imageinformation to the eye with various levels of wavefront curvature orlight ray divergence. Each waveguide level may be associated with aparticular depth plane and may be configured to output image informationcorresponding to that depth plane. Image injection devices 360, 370,380, 390, 400 may function as a source of light for the waveguides andmay be utilized to inject image information into the waveguides 270,280, 290, 300, 310, each of which may be configured, as describedherein, to distribute incoming light across each respective waveguide,for output toward the eye 210. Light exits an output surface 410, 420,430, 440, 450 of the image injection devices 360, 370, 380, 390, 400 andis injected into a corresponding input surface 460, 470, 480, 490, 500of the waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310. In some embodiments, the eachof the input surfaces 460, 470, 480, 490, 500 may be an edge of acorresponding waveguide, or may be part of a major surface of thecorresponding waveguide (that is, one of the waveguide surfaces directlyfacing the world 510 or the viewer's eye 210). In some embodiments, asingle beam of light (e.g. a collimated beam) may be injected into eachwaveguide to output an entire field of cloned collimated beams that aredirected toward the eye 210 at particular angles (and amounts ofdivergence) corresponding to the depth plane associated with aparticular waveguide. In some embodiments, a single one of the imageinjection devices 360, 370, 380, 390, 400 may be associated with andinject light into a plurality (e.g., three) of the waveguides 270, 280,290, 300, 310.

In some embodiments, the image injection devices 360, 370, 380, 390, 400are discrete displays that each produce image information for injectioninto a corresponding waveguide 270, 280, 290, 300, 310, respectively. Insome other embodiments, the image injection devices 360, 370, 380, 390,400 are the output ends of a single multiplexed display which may, e.g.,pipe image information via one or more optical conduits (such as fiberoptic cables) to each of the image injection devices 360, 370, 380, 390,400. It will be appreciated that the image information provided by theimage injection devices 360, 370, 380, 390, 400 may include light ofdifferent wavelengths, or colors (e.g., different component colors, asdiscussed herein).

In some embodiments, the light injected into the waveguides 270, 280,290, 300, 310 is provided by a light projector system 520, whichcomprises a light module 540, which may include a light emitter, such asa light emitting diode (LED). The light from the light module 540 may bedirected to and modified by a light modulator 530, e.g., a spatial lightmodulator, via a beam splitter 550. The light modulator 530 may beconfigured to change the perceived intensity of the light injected intothe waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310. Examples of spatial lightmodulators include liquid crystal displays (LCD) including a liquidcrystal on silicon (LCOS) displays. It will be appreciated that theimage injection devices 360, 370, 380, 390, 400 are illustratedschematically and, in some embodiments, these image injection devicesmay represent different light paths and locations in a common projectionsystem configured to output light into associated ones of the waveguides270, 280, 290, 300, 310.

In some embodiments, the display system 250 may be a scanning fiberdisplay comprising one or more scanning fibers configured to projectlight in various patterns (e.g., raster scan, spiral scan, Lissajouspatterns, etc.) into one or more waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310 andultimately to the eye 210 of the viewer. In some embodiments, theillustrated image injection devices 360, 370, 380, 390, 400 mayschematically represent a single scanning fiber or a bundle of scanningfibers configured to inject light into one or a plurality of thewaveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310. In some other embodiments, theillustrated image injection devices 360, 370, 380, 390, 400 mayschematically represent a plurality of scanning fibers or a plurality ofbundles of scanning fibers, each of which are configured to inject lightinto an associated one of the waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310. Itwill be appreciated that one or more optical fibers may be configured totransmit light from the light module 540 to the one or more waveguides270, 280, 290, 300, 310. It will be appreciated that one or moreintervening optical structures may be provided between the scanningfiber, or fibers, and the one or more waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310to, e.g., redirect light exiting the scanning fiber into the one or morewaveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310.

A controller 560 controls the operation of one or more of the stackedwaveguide assembly 260, including operation of the image injectiondevices 360, 370, 380, 390, 400, the light source 540, and the lightmodulator 530. In some embodiments, the controller 560 is part of thelocal data processing module 140. The controller 560 includesprogramming (e.g., instructions in a non-transitory medium) thatregulates the timing and provision of image information to thewaveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310 according to, e.g., any of thevarious schemes disclosed herein. In some embodiments, the controllermay be a single integral device, or a distributed system connected bywired or wireless communication channels. The controller 560 may be partof the processing modules 140 or 150 (FIG. 2 ) in some embodiments.

With continued reference to FIG. 6 , the waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300,310 may be configured to propagate light within each respectivewaveguide by total internal reflection (TIR). The waveguides 270, 280,290, 300, 310 may each be planar or have another shape (e.g., curved),with major top and bottom surfaces and edges extending between thosemajor top and bottom surfaces. In the illustrated configuration, thewaveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310 may each include out-coupling opticalelements 570, 580, 590, 600, 610 that are configured to extract lightout of a waveguide by redirecting the light, propagating within eachrespective waveguide, out of the waveguide to output image informationto the eye 210. Extracted light may also be referred to as out-coupledlight and the out-coupling optical elements light may also be referredto light extracting optical elements. An extracted beam of light may beoutputted by the waveguide at locations at which the light propagatingin the waveguide strikes a light extracting optical element. Theout-coupling optical elements 570, 580, 590, 600, 610 may, for example,be gratings, including diffractive optical features, as discussedfurther herein. While illustrated disposed at the bottom major surfacesof the waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310, for ease of description anddrawing clarity, in some embodiments, the out-coupling optical elements570, 580, 590, 600, 610 may be disposed at the top and/or bottom majorsurfaces, and/or may be disposed directly in the volume of thewaveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310, as discussed further herein. In someembodiments, the out-coupling optical elements 570, 580, 590, 600, 610may be formed in a layer of material that is attached to a transparentsubstrate to form the waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310. In some otherembodiments, the waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310 may be a monolithicpiece of material and the out-coupling optical elements 570, 580, 590,600, 610 may be formed on a surface and/or in the interior of that pieceof material.

With continued reference to FIG. 6 , as discussed herein, each waveguide270, 280, 290, 300, 310 is configured to output light to form an imagecorresponding to a particular depth plane. For example, the waveguide270 nearest the eye may be configured to deliver collimated light (whichwas injected into such waveguide 270), to the eye 210. The collimatedlight may be representative of the optical infinity focal plane. Thenext waveguide up 280 may be configured to send out collimated lightwhich passes through the first lens 350 (e.g., a negative lens) beforeit can reach the eye 210; such first lens 350 may be configured tocreate a slight convex wavefront curvature so that the eye/braininterprets light coming from that next waveguide up 280 as coming from afirst focal plane closer inward toward the eye 210 from opticalinfinity. Similarly, the third up waveguide 290 passes its output lightthrough both the first 350 and second 340 lenses before reaching the eye210; the combined optical power of the first 350 and second 340 lensesmay be configured to create another incremental amount of wavefrontcurvature so that the eye/brain interprets light coming from the thirdwaveguide 290 as coming from a second focal plane that is even closerinward toward the person from optical infinity than was light from thenext waveguide up 280.

The other waveguide layers 300, 310 and lenses 330, 320 are similarlyconfigured, with the highest waveguide 310 in the stack sending itsoutput through all of the lenses between it and the eye for an aggregatefocal power representative of the closest focal plane to the person. Tocompensate for the stack of lenses 320, 330, 340, 350 whenviewing/interpreting light coming from the world 510 on the other sideof the stacked waveguide assembly 260, a compensating lens layer 620 maybe disposed at the top of the stack to compensate for the aggregatepower of the lens stack 320, 330, 340, 350 below. Such a configurationprovides as many perceived focal planes as there are availablewaveguide/lens pairings. Both the out-coupling optical elements of thewaveguides and the focusing aspects of the lenses may be static (i.e.,not dynamic or electro-active). In some alternative embodiments, eitheror both may be dynamic using electro-active features.

In some embodiments, two or more of the waveguides 270, 280, 290, 300,310 may have the same associated depth plane. For example, multiplewaveguides 270, 280, 290, 300, 310 may be configured to output imagesset to the same depth plane, or multiple subsets of the waveguides 270,280, 290, 300, 310 may be configured to output images set to the sameplurality of depth planes, with one set for each depth plane. This canprovide advantages for forming a tiled image to provide an expandedfield of view at those depth planes.

With continued reference to FIG. 6 , the out-coupling optical elements570, 580, 590, 600, 610 may be configured to both redirect light out oftheir respective waveguides and to output this light with theappropriate amount of divergence or collimation for a particular depthplane associated with the waveguide. As a result, waveguides havingdifferent associated depth planes may have different configurations ofout-coupling optical elements 570, 580, 590, 600, 610, which outputlight with a different amount of divergence depending on the associateddepth plane. In some embodiments, the light extracting optical elements570, 580, 590, 600, 610 may be volumetric or surface features, which maybe configured to output light at specific angles. For example, the lightextracting optical elements 570, 580, 590, 600, 610 may be volumeholograms, surface holograms, and/or diffraction gratings. In someembodiments, the features 320, 330, 340, 350 may not be lenses; rather,they may simply be spacers (e.g., cladding layers and/or structures forforming air gaps).

In some embodiments, the out-coupling optical elements 570, 580, 590,600, 610 are diffractive features that form a diffraction pattern, or“diffractive optical element” (also referred to herein as a “DOE”).Preferably, the DOE's have a sufficiently low diffraction efficiency sothat only a portion of the light of the beam is deflected away towardthe eye 210 with each intersection of the DOE, while the rest continuesto move through a waveguide via TIR. The light carrying the imageinformation is thus divided into a number of related exit beams thatexit the waveguide at a multiplicity of locations and the result is afairly uniform pattern of exit emission toward the eye 210 for thisparticular collimated beam bouncing around within a waveguide.

In some embodiments, one or more DOEs may be switchable between “on”states in which they actively diffract, and “off” states in which theydo not significantly diffract. For instance, a switchable DOE maycomprise a layer of polymer dispersed liquid crystal, in whichmicrodroplets comprise a diffraction pattern in a host medium, and therefractive index of the microdroplets may be switched to substantiallymatch the refractive index of the host material (in which case thepattern does not appreciably diffract incident light) or themicrodroplet may be switched to an index that does not match that of thehost medium (in which case the pattern actively diffracts incidentlight).

In some embodiments, a camera assembly 630 (e.g., a digital camera,including visible light and infrared light cameras) may be provided tocapture images of the eye 210 and/or tissue around the eye 210 to, e.g.,detect user inputs and/or to monitor the physiological state of theuser. As used herein, a camera may be any image capture device. In someembodiments, the camera assembly 630 may include an image capture deviceand a light source to project light (e.g., infrared light) to the eye,which may then be reflected by the eye and detected by the image capturedevice. In some embodiments, the camera assembly 630 may be attached tothe frame 80 (FIG. 2 ) and may be in electrical communication with theprocessing modules 140 and/or 150, which may process image informationfrom the camera assembly 630. In some embodiments, one camera assembly630 may be utilized for each eye, to separately monitor each eye.

With reference now to FIG. 7 , an example of exit beams outputted by awaveguide is shown. One waveguide is illustrated, but it will beappreciated that other waveguides in the waveguide assembly 260 (FIG. 6) may function similarly, where the waveguide assembly 260 includesmultiple waveguides. Light 640 is injected into the waveguide 270 at theinput surface 460 of the waveguide 270 and propagates within thewaveguide 270 by TIR. At points where the light 640 impinges on the DOE570, a portion of the light exits the waveguide as exit beams 650. Theexit beams 650 are illustrated as substantially parallel but, asdiscussed herein, they may also be redirected to propagate to the eye210 at an angle (e.g., forming divergent exit beams), depending on thedepth plane associated with the waveguide 270. It will be appreciatedthat substantially parallel exit beams may be indicative of a waveguidewith out-coupling optical elements that out-couple light to form imagesthat appear to be set on a depth plane at a large distance (e.g.,optical infinity) from the eye 210. Other waveguides or other sets ofout-coupling optical elements may output an exit beam pattern that ismore divergent, which would require the eye 210 to accommodate to acloser distance to bring it into focus on the retina and would beinterpreted by the brain as light from a distance closer to the eye 210than optical infinity.

In some embodiments, a full color image may be formed at each depthplane by overlaying images in each of the component colors, e.g., threeor more component colors. FIG. 8 illustrates an example of a stackedwaveguide assembly in which each depth plane includes images formedusing multiple different component colors. The illustrated embodimentshows depth planes 240 a-240 f, although more or fewer depths are alsocontemplated. Each depth plane may have three or more component colorimages associated with it, including: a first image of a first color, G;a second image of a second color, R; and a third image of a third color,B. Different depth planes are indicated in the figure by differentnumbers for diopters (dpt) following the letters G, R, and B. Just asexamples, the numbers following each of these letters indicate diopters(1/m), or inverse distance of the depth plane from a viewer, and eachbox in the figures represents an individual component color image. Insome embodiments, to account for differences in the eye's focusing oflight of different wavelengths, the exact placement of the depth planesfor different component colors may vary. For example, differentcomponent color images for a given depth plane may be placed on depthplanes corresponding to different distances from the user. Such anarrangement may increase visual acuity and user comfort and/or maydecrease chromatic aberrations.

In some embodiments, light of each component color may be outputted by asingle dedicated waveguide and, consequently, each depth plane may havemultiple waveguides associated with it. In such embodiments, each box inthe figures including the letters G, R, or B may be understood torepresent an individual waveguide, and three waveguides may be providedper depth plane where three component color images are provided perdepth plane. While the waveguides associated with each depth plane areshown adjacent to one another in this drawing for ease of description,it will be appreciated that, in a physical device, the waveguides mayall be arranged in a stack with one waveguide per level. In some otherembodiments, multiple component colors may be outputted by the samewaveguide, such that, e.g., only a single waveguide may be provided perdepth plane.

With continued reference to FIG. 8 , in some embodiments, G is the colorgreen, R is the color red, and B is the color blue. In some otherembodiments, other colors associated with other wavelengths of light,including magenta and cyan, may be used in addition to or may replaceone or more of red, green, or blue.

It will be appreciated that references to a given color of lightthroughout this disclosure will be understood to encompass light of oneor more wavelengths within a range of wavelengths of light that areperceived by a viewer as being of that given color. For example, redlight may include light of one or more wavelengths in the range of about620-780 nm, green light may include light of one or more wavelengths inthe range of about 492-577 nm, and blue light may include light of oneor more wavelengths in the range of about 435-493 nm.

In some embodiments, the light source 540 (FIG. 6 ) may be configured toemit light of one or more wavelengths outside the visual perceptionrange of the viewer, for example, infrared and/or ultravioletwavelengths. In addition, the in-coupling, out-coupling, and other lightredirecting structures of the waveguides of the display 250 may beconfigured to direct and emit this light out of the display towards theuser's eye 210, e.g., for imaging and/or user stimulation applications.

With reference now to FIG. 9A, in some embodiments, light impinging on awaveguide may need to be redirected to in-couple that light into thewaveguide. An in-coupling optical element may be used to redirect andin-couple the light into its corresponding waveguide. FIG. 9Aillustrates a cross-sectional side view of an example of a plurality orset 660 of stacked waveguides that each includes an in-coupling opticalelement. The waveguides may each be configured to output light of one ormore different wavelengths, or one or more different ranges ofwavelengths. It will be appreciated that the stack 660 may correspond tothe stack 260 (FIG. 6 ) and the illustrated waveguides of the stack 660may correspond to part of the plurality of waveguides 270, 280, 290,300, 310, except that light from one or more of the image injectiondevices 360, 370, 380, 390, 400 is injected into the waveguides from aposition that requires light to be redirected for in-coupling.

The illustrated set 660 of stacked waveguides includes waveguides 670,680, and 690. Each waveguide includes an associated in-coupling opticalelement (which may also be referred to as a light input area on thewaveguide), with, e.g., in-coupling optical element 700 disposed on amajor surface (e.g., an upper major surface) of waveguide 670,in-coupling optical element 710 disposed on a major surface (e.g., anupper major surface) of waveguide 680, and in-coupling optical element720 disposed on a major surface (e.g., an upper major surface) ofwaveguide 690. In some embodiments, one or more of the in-couplingoptical elements 700, 710, 720 may be disposed on the bottom majorsurface of the respective waveguide 670, 680, 690 (particularly wherethe one or more in-coupling optical elements are reflective, deflectingoptical elements). As illustrated, the in-coupling optical elements 700,710, 720 may be disposed on the upper major surface of their respectivewaveguide 670, 680, 690 (or the top of the next lower waveguide),particularly where those in-coupling optical elements are transmissive,deflecting optical elements. In some embodiments, the in-couplingoptical elements 700, 710, 720 may be disposed in the body of therespective waveguide 670, 680, 690. In some embodiments, as discussedherein, the in-coupling optical elements 700, 710, 720 are wavelengthselective, such that they selectively redirect one or more wavelengthsof light, while transmitting other wavelengths of light. Whileillustrated on one side or corner of their respective waveguide 670,680, 690, it will be appreciated that the in-coupling optical elements700, 710, 720 may be disposed in other areas of their respectivewaveguide 670, 680, 690 in some embodiments.

As illustrated, the in-coupling optical elements 700, 710, 720 may belaterally offset from one another. In some embodiments, each in-couplingoptical element may be offset such that it receives light without thatlight passing through another in-coupling optical element. For example,each in-coupling optical element 700, 710, 720 may be configured toreceive light from a different image injection device 360, 370, 380,390, and 400 as shown in FIG. 6 , and may be separated (e.g., laterallyspaced apart) from other in-coupling optical elements 700, 710, 720 suchthat it substantially does not receive light from the other ones of thein-coupling optical elements 700, 710, 720.

Each waveguide also includes associated light distributing elements,with, e.g., light distributing elements 730 disposed on a major surface(e.g., a top major surface) of waveguide 670, light distributingelements 740 disposed on a major surface (e.g., a top major surface) ofwaveguide 680, and light distributing elements 750 disposed on a majorsurface (e.g., a top major surface) of waveguide 690. In some otherembodiments, the light distributing elements 730, 740, 750, may bedisposed on a bottom major surface of associated waveguides 670, 680,690, respectively. In some other embodiments, the light distributingelements 730, 740, 750, may be disposed on both top and bottom majorsurface of associated waveguides 670, 680, 690, respectively; or thelight distributing elements 730, 740, 750, may be disposed on differentones of the top and bottom major surfaces in different associatedwaveguides 670, 680, 690, respectively.

The waveguides 670, 680, 690 may be spaced apart and separated by, e.g.,gas, liquid, and/or solid layers of material. For example, asillustrated, layer 760 a may separate waveguides 670 and 680; and layer760 b may separate waveguides 680 and 690. In some embodiments, thelayers 760 a and 760 b are formed of low refractive index materials(that is, materials having a lower refractive index than the materialforming the immediately adjacent one of waveguides 670, 680, 690).Preferably, the refractive index of the material forming the layers 760a, 760 b is 0.05 or more, or 0.10 or less than the refractive index ofthe material forming the waveguides 670, 680, 690. Advantageously, thelower refractive index layers 760 a, 760 b may function as claddinglayers that facilitate total internal reflection (TIR) of light throughthe waveguides 670, 680, 690 (e.g., TIR between the top and bottom majorsurfaces of each waveguide). In some embodiments, the layers 760 a, 760b are formed of air. While not illustrated, it will be appreciated thatthe top and bottom of the illustrated set 660 of waveguides may includeimmediately neighboring cladding layers.

Preferably, for ease of manufacturing and other considerations, thematerial forming the waveguides 670, 680, 690 are similar or the same,and the material forming the layers 760 a, 760 b are similar or thesame. In some embodiments, the material forming the waveguides 670, 680,690 may be different between one or more waveguides, and/or the materialforming the layers 760 a, 760 b may be different, while still holding tothe various refractive index relationships noted above.

With continued reference to FIG. 9A, light rays 770, 780, 790 areincident on the set 660 of waveguides. It will be appreciated that thelight rays 770, 780, 790 may be injected into the waveguides 670, 680,690 by one or more image injection devices 360, 370, 380, 390, 400 (FIG.6 ).

In some embodiments, the light rays 770, 780, 790 have differentproperties, e.g., different wavelengths or different ranges ofwavelengths, which may correspond to different colors. The in-couplingoptical elements 700, 710, 720 each deflect the incident light such thatthe light propagates through a respective one of the waveguides 670,680, 690 by TIR. In some embodiments, the incoupling optical elements700, 710, 720 each selectively deflect one or more particularwavelengths of light, while transmitting other wavelengths to anunderlying waveguide and associated incoupling optical element.

For example, in-coupling optical element 700 may be configured todeflect ray 770, which has a first wavelength or range of wavelengths,while transmitting rays 780 and 790, which have different second andthird wavelengths or ranges of wavelengths, respectively. Thetransmitted ray 780 impinges on and is deflected by the in-couplingoptical element 710, which is configured to deflect light of a secondwavelength or range of wavelengths. The ray 790 is deflected by thein-coupling optical element 720, which is configured to selectivelydeflect light of third wavelength or range of wavelengths.

With continued reference to FIG. 9A, the deflected light rays 770, 780,790 are deflected so that they propagate through a correspondingwaveguide 670, 680, 690; that is, the in-coupling optical elements 700,710, 720 of each waveguide deflects light into that correspondingwaveguide 670, 680, 690 to in-couple light into that correspondingwaveguide. The light rays 770, 780, 790 are deflected at angles thatcause the light to propagate through the respective waveguide 670, 680,690 by TIR. The light rays 770, 780, 790 propagate through therespective waveguide 670, 680, 690 by TIR until impinging on thewaveguide's corresponding light distributing elements 730, 740, 750.

With reference now to FIG. 9B, a perspective view of an example of theplurality of stacked waveguides of FIG. 9A is illustrated. As notedabove, the in-coupled light rays 770, 780, 790, are deflected by thein-coupling optical elements 700, 710, 720, respectively, and thenpropagate by TIR within the waveguides 670, 680, 690, respectively. Thelight rays 770, 780, 790 then impinge on the light distributing elements730, 740, 750, respectively. The light distributing elements 730, 740,750 deflect the light rays 770, 780, 790 so that they propagate towardsthe out-coupling optical elements 800, 810, 820, respectively.

In some embodiments, the light distributing elements 730, 740, 750 areorthogonal pupil expanders (OPE's). In some embodiments, the OPE'sdeflect or distribute light to the out-coupling optical elements 800,810, 820 and, in some embodiments, may also increase the beam or spotsize of this light as it propagates to the out-coupling opticalelements. In some embodiments, the light distributing elements 730, 740,750 may be omitted and the in-coupling optical elements 700, 710, 720may be configured to deflect light directly to the out-coupling opticalelements 800, 810, 820. For example, with reference to FIG. 9A, thelight distributing elements 730, 740, 750 may be replaced without-coupling optical elements 800, 810, 820, respectively. In someembodiments, the out-coupling optical elements 800, 810, 820 are exitpupils (EP's) or exit pupil expanders (EPE's) that direct light in aviewer's eye 210 (FIG. 7 ). It will be appreciated that the OPE's may beconfigured to increase the dimensions of the eye box in at least oneaxis and the EPE's may be to increase the eye box in an axis crossing,e.g., orthogonal to, the axis of the OPEs. For example, each OPE may beconfigured to redirect a portion of the light striking the OPE to an EPEof the same waveguide, while allowing the remaining portion of the lightto continue to propagate down the waveguide. Upon impinging on the OPEagain, another portion of the remaining light is redirected to the EPE,and the remaining portion of that portion continues to propagate furtherdown the waveguide, and so on. Similarly, upon striking the EPE, aportion of the impinging light is directed out of the waveguide towardsthe user, and a remaining portion of that light continues to propagatethrough the waveguide until it strikes the EP again, at which timeanother portion of the impinging light is directed out of the waveguide,and so on. Consequently, a single beam of incoupled light may be“replicated” each time a portion of that light is redirected by an OPEor EPE, thereby forming a field of cloned beams of light, as shown inFIG. 6 . In some embodiments, the OPE and/or EPE may be configured tomodify a size of the beams of light.

Accordingly, with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, in some embodiments, theset 660 of waveguides includes waveguides 670, 680, 690; in-couplingoptical elements 700, 710, 720; light distributing elements (e.g.,OPE's) 730, 740, 750; and out-coupling optical elements (e.g., EP's)800, 810, 820 for each component color. The waveguides 670, 680, 690 maybe stacked with an air gap/cladding layer between each one. Thein-coupling optical elements 700, 710, 720 redirect or deflect incidentlight (with different in-coupling optical elements receiving light ofdifferent wavelengths) into its waveguide. The light then propagates atan angle which will result in TIR within the respective waveguide 670,680, 690. In the example shown, light ray 770 (e.g., blue light) isdeflected by the first in-coupling optical element 700, and thencontinues to bounce down the waveguide, interacting with the lightdistributing element (e.g., OPE's) 730 and then the out-coupling opticalelement (e.g., EPs) 800, in a manner described earlier. The light rays780 and 790 (e.g., green and red light, respectively) will pass throughthe waveguide 670, with light ray 780 impinging on and being deflectedby in-coupling optical element 710. The light ray 780 then bounces downthe waveguide 680 via TIR, proceeding on to its light distributingelement (e.g., OPEs) 740 and then the out-coupling optical element(e.g., EP's) 810. Finally, light ray 790 (e.g., red light) passesthrough the waveguide 690 to impinge on the light in-coupling opticalelements 720 of the waveguide 690. The light in-coupling opticalelements 720 deflect the light ray 790 such that the light raypropagates to light distributing element (e.g., OPEs) 750 by TIR, andthen to the out-coupling optical element (e.g., EPs) 820 by TIR. Theout-coupling optical element 820 then finally out-couples the light ray790 to the viewer, who also receives the out-coupled light from theother waveguides 670, 680.

FIG. 9C illustrates a top-down plan view of an example of the pluralityof stacked waveguides of FIGS. 9A and 9B. As illustrated, the waveguides670, 680, 690, along with each waveguide's associated light distributingelement 730, 740, 750 and associated out-coupling optical element 800,810, 820, may be vertically aligned. However, as discussed herein, thein-coupling optical elements 700, 710, 720 are not vertically aligned;rather, the in-coupling optical elements are preferably non-overlapping(e.g., laterally spaced apart as seen in the top-down view). Asdiscussed further herein, this nonoverlapping spatial arrangementfacilitates the injection of light from different resources intodifferent waveguides on a one-to-one basis, thereby allowing a specificlight source to be uniquely coupled to a specific waveguide. In someembodiments, arrangements including nonoverlapping spatially-separatedin-coupling optical elements may be referred to as a shifted pupilsystem, and the in-coupling optical elements within these arrangementsmay correspond to sub pupils.

Eye Imaging and Environment Imaging

As discussed above, head mounted displays can be used to provide imagecontent to a user integrated with, in conjunction with, and/orsuperimposed over the view of the world in front of the wearer. Suchhead mounted display systems can be configured to project light into aneye of a user to form augmented reality image content as well as totransmit light from an environment in front of the user to the user. Ahead mounted display system may include one or more cameras for imagingthe environment and/or the user's eye. Outward facing cameras may beused for directly imaging the environment, for example, to determinewhere to place augmented reality image content with respect to objectsin the environment. For example, imaging the environment may provide thelocation of a table such that the head mounted display may render animage of person standing next to the table instead of on the table or inthe table. Inward-facing cameras may be used for directly imaging theeye such as for eye tracking. Disclosed herein are examples ofhead-mounted display systems and/or imaging systems that can beconfigured also to image the eye and/or the environment. In somedesigns, the systems do not require inward and/or outward facing camerasto directly image the eye and/or environment, respectively. Such systemsmay employ one or more cameras that are configured to receive light fromthe eye/environment via the eyepiece such as one or more waveguides inthe eyepiece that are in optical communication with the one or morecameras. With the light collected by the waveguide(s), the one or morecameras can generate images of the eye and/or the environment in frontof the user. Using the waveguide to collect the light for imaging theeye and/or environment may potentially reduce the form factor of thehead mounted display, making the head mounted display possibly morecompact and/or aesthetically desirable.

FIG. 10 illustrates an example imaging system 900 configured to imagethe eye that is integrated with an eyepiece 950 that can be used on inhead mounted display. The eyepiece 950, which can be disposed in frontof the user's eye 210 can be used to both inject image content into theeye as well as image the eye. FIG. 10 shows one eyepiece 950 in front ofone eye 210. Various head mounted display systems such as shown in FIG.2, may include a pair of eyepieces 950 and associated componentsdisposed in front of respective left and right eyes 210. A singlewaveguide 940 is shown in FIG. 10 , but the waveguide 940 may includeone, two, three, four, six, seven, eight, or more waveguides (e.g., oneor more stacks of waveguides).

The imaging system 900 can include a light source or illumination source960 illuminating the eye to facilitate image capture, the eyepiece 950comprising a waveguide 940 configured to propagate light therein, and/oran imaging device 920 such as a camera for image capture. An imageprojector 930 for producing an image that can be injected into the eyevia the eyepiece 950 is also shown. The eyepiece 950 may include one ormore waveguides 940 configured to transport light from the illuminationsource 960 and/or image projector 930 to the eye and to transport lightfrom the eye to the camera 920. The eyepiece 950 may further compriseone or more coupling optical elements 944 for coupling light out of thewaveguide 940 and to the eye for illuminating the eye and for imageinjection and/or from the eye and into the waveguide for image capture.The eyepiece 950 may additionally comprise one or more incouplingoptical elements 942 for coupling light from the illumination source 960and/or image projector 930 into the waveguides 940 as well as one ormore outcoupling optical elements 952 for coupling light from thewaveguide out to the camera 920.

The eyepiece 950 may be disposed on a frame wearable on the head. Theeyepiece 950 may be disposed in front of the eye 210. The eyepiece 950may have a medial or nasal side closer to the nose of the wearer and anopposite lateral or temporal side closer to the temples and farther fromthe nose of the wearer. In FIG. 10 , the coupling optical element 944 ismedial or nasal with respect to the incoupling 942 and outcoupling 952optical elements (which are lateral or temporal to the coupling opticalelements 944). The illumination source 960 is also more medial or nasalwith respect to the image projector 930 (or the image projector is morelateral or temporal than the illumination source.) The relativepositions can be different, however. For example, the illuminationsource 960 may be more lateral or temporal than the image projector 930in some designs.

The waveguide 940 may comprise a sheet or layer having two majorsurfaces (a forward and a rearward surface), having the largest surfaceareas, disposed opposite one another. The forward surface may be fartherfrom the user's eye 210 (closer to the environment in front of thewearer) and the rearward closer to the user's eye (and farther from theenvironment in front of the wearer) when the user wears the head mounteddisplay. The waveguide 940 may comprise a transparent material with anindex of refraction greater than 1.0 (e.g., glass, plastic) such thatlight may be guided therein by total internal reflection between themajor surfaces. Elements with the same numbers may have the samefunctionality for one or more of the embodiments described herein.

A coupling optical element 944 for coupling light to the eye 210 fromwaveguide 940 and/or from the waveguide to the eye may be disposed on orin the waveguide 940. As shown in FIG. 10 , the coupling optical element944 may be disposed in an optical path between the user's eye 210 andthe waveguide 940 such that light coupled from the waveguide 940 via thecoupling optical element 944 may be incident on the user's eye 210 (forexample to illuminate the eye and/or for image injection). The couplingoptical element 944 may comprise a plurality of turning featuresconfigured to turn light guided within the waveguide out of thewaveguide or turn light incident on the coupling optical element 944 atan angle into the waveguide to be guided therein by total internalreflection. The coupling optical element 944 and turning features may bein physical engagement with the waveguide 940. For example, the couplingoptical element 944 may comprise a holographic or diffractive opticalelement (e.g., surface relief grating) patterned (e.g., etched) in or onthe waveguide 940. The coupling optical element 944 may comprise a layerdisposed on the waveguide 940 or may be formed in the waveguide 940. Forexample, a volume holographic or other diffractive optical element maybe formed by changing the index of refraction of material comprising thewaveguide or a layer disposed thereon. Accordingly, the coupling opticalelement 944 may be disposed in the volume of the waveguide 940 or as alayer disposed thereon.

Depending on the design, the coupling optical element 944 may betransmissive or reflective and may operate in transmission orreflection. For example, the coupling optical element 944 may include atransmissive or reflective diffractive optical element (e.g., grating)or holographical optical element that operates in transmission orreflection respectively, e.g., turning light via that is transmittedtherethrough or that is reflected therefrom. The coupling opticalelement 944 can include a polarization optical element, such as apolarization selective turning element (e.g., polarizer). Thepolarization selective turning element may include one or morepolarization gratings, diffractive optical elements, and/or holographicoptical elements and may comprise liquid crystal structures such asliquid crystal polarization gratings. The coupling optical element 944may be configured to direct light from the image projector 930 and/orlight source 960 guided within the waveguide 940 by total internalreflection (TIR) to the user's eye 210 at an angle less than (e.g., morenormal) than the critical angle so as to be ejected out of the waveguideto the eye. Additionally or in the alternative, the coupling opticalelement 944 may be configured to couple light from the eye 210 into thewaveguide 940 at an angle greater (e.g., less normal) than the criticalangle so as to be guided therein by total internal reflection to thecamera 920.

As shown in FIG. 10 , an incoupling optical element 942 for couplinglight from the illumination source 960 and/or the image projector 930into the waveguide 940 may be disposed on or in the waveguide 940. Theincoupling optical element 942 may be disposed in an optical pathbetween the light source 960 and the waveguide 940 such that lightcoupled from the light source 960 via the incoupling optical element 942is guided within the waveguide 940. The incoupling optical element 942may comprise, for example, a plurality of turning features configured toturn light incident thereon at an angle into the waveguide to be guidedtherein by total internal reflection. The incoupling optical element 942may comprise liquid crystal structures such as liquid crystalpolarization gratings. Additionally or alternatively, the incouplingoptical element 942 may include a blazed grating. The incoupling opticalelement 942 may comprise a layer disposed on the waveguide 940 or may beformed on or in the waveguide 940 (e.g., patterned) or may be otherwisemanufactured therein. For example, a surface holographic or diffractiveoptical element (e.g., surface relief grating) may be fabricated bypatterning (e.g., etching) a surface of the waveguide or a layerthereon. A volume holographic or diffractive optical element may also beformed by changing the index of refraction of material comprising thewaveguide or a layer disposed thereon. Accordingly, the incouplingoptical element 942 may be disposed in the volume of the waveguide 940or a layer disposed thereon. Depending on the design, the incouplingoptical element 942 may be transmissive or reflective and may operate intransmission or reflection. For example, the incoupling optical element942 may include a transmissive or reflective diffractive optical element(e.g., grating) or holographical optical element that operates intransmission or reflection, respectively, e.g., turning light that istransmitted therethrough or that is reflected therefrom.

The incoupling optical element 942 may comprise a reflective opticalelement (e.g., mirror). For example, the incoupling optical element 942may comprise an off-axis reflector. Additionally or alternatively, theincoupling optical element 942 and/or coupling optical element 944 caninclude a polarization optical element, such as a polarization selectiveturning element (e.g., polarizer). The polarization selective turningelement may include one or more polarization gratings, diffractiveoptical elements, and/or holographic optical elements and may compriseliquid crystal structures such as liquid crystal polarization gratings.For example, one or both of the incoupling optical element 942 and/orthe coupling optical element 944 can include liquid crystal polarizationgratings (LCPGs). LCPGs can provide high efficiency diffractionpotentially at broad wavelengths. Accordingly, LCPGs may be useful forincoupling optical elements 942 and/or the coupling optical element 944.The LCPG may be polarization dependent. The LCPG or other type of liquidcrystal grating, diffractive optical element, or optical element mayinclude a pattern or arrangement of molecules of liquid crystalconfigured to provide one or more functions such as turn light into awaveguide or out of a waveguide. Accordingly, incoupling optical element942 and/or the coupling optical element 944 may comprise polarizationgratings. Additionally or alternatively, incoupling optical element 942and/or the coupling optical element 944 can comprises liquid crystal andthus in some implementations one or both may be liquid crystal gratingsor liquid crystal diffractive optical elements. Additionally oralternatively, one or both of the incoupling optical element 942 and/orthe coupling optical element 944 can include a blazed grating. In somedesigns, the incoupling optical element 942 comprises a liquid crystalreflector, such as a cholesteric liquid crystal reflective lens (e.g.,reflective liquid crystal diffraction lens, Bragg-reflective structure,reflective liquid crystal diffraction grating, etc.). Some nonlimitingexamples of liquid crystal gratings, liquid crystal polarizationgratings and other liquid crystal optical elements are discussed in thefollowing published applications, each of which is hereby incorporatedby reference herein in its entirety and for all purposes: U.S.Publication No. 2018/0143438, titled “MULTILAYER LIQUID CRYSTALDIFFRACTIVE GRATINGS FOR REDIRECTING LIGHT OF WIDE INCIDENT ANGLERANGES,” filed on Nov. 16, 2017; U.S. Publication No. 2018/0143485,titled “SPATIALLY VARIABLE LIQUID CRYSTAL DIFFRACTION GRATINGS,” filedon Nov. 16, 2017; U.S. Publication No. 2018/0143509, titled “WAVEGUIDELIGHT MULTIPLEXER USING CROSSED GRATINGS,” filed on Nov. 16, 2017; U.S.Publication No. 2018/0239147, titled “DISPLAY SYSTEM WITH VARIABLE POWERREFLECTOR,” filed on Feb. 22, 2018; U.S. Publication No. 2018/0239177,titled “VARIABLE-FOCUS VIRTUAL IMAGE DEVICES BASED ON POLARIZATIONCONVERSION,” filed on Feb. 22, 2018; and U.S. Publication No.2018/0164627, titled “DIFFRACTIVE DEVICES BASED ON CHOLESTERIC LIQUIDCRYSTAL,” filed on Dec. 7, 2017. The designs of the incoupling opticalelement 942 and/or the coupling optical element 944, however, are notlimited to these and may include other types of optical elements,diffractive optical element, liquid crystal optical element, liquidcrystal gratings and liquid crystal polarization gratings. Furtherinformation on examples of cholesteric liquid crystal structures such asreflectors may also be found below in in the section titled “CholestericLiquid Crystal Mirror.” As discussed above, other liquid crystal opticalelements as well as other non-liquid crystal optical elements may beused. Accordingly, many types of coupling optical elements (e.g.incoupling optical element 942 and/or the coupling optical element 944),diffractive optical element, gratings, polarization gratings, etc., maybe used, both those described herein as well as other types of gratings,diffractive optical elements, liquid crystal elements, and opticalelements generally. In various implementations, the incoupling opticalelement 942 may be configured to couple light from the image projector930 and/or the light source 960 into the waveguide at an angle greaterthan the critical angle so as to be guided within the waveguide 940 bytotal internal reflection to the eye to the user's eye 210.

The waveguide 940 may comprise one or more waveguides. In someimplementations, the one or more waveguides 940 comprises a stack ofwaveguides. In some designs, for example, different waveguides of thestack of waveguides are configured to output light with differentwavefront divergence as if projected from different distances from theuser's eye. For example, a first waveguide or group of waveguides may beconfigured to output light that is collimated or has a first divergenceas if projected from a first depth, and a second waveguide or group ofwaveguides may be configured to output light that is diverging (notcollimated) or is at a second divergence (greater than the firstdivergence) as if projected from a second depth closer than the firstdepth. In some designs, the different waveguides may be configured tooutput light having different associated colors. For example, a firstwaveguide may be configured to output red light, a second waveguide maybe configured to output green light, and a third waveguide may beconfigured to output blue light. A fourth waveguide may be configured tooutput and/or input infrared light.

The outcoupling optical element 952 for coupling light from thewaveguide 940 to the camera 920 such as shown in FIG. 10 may comprise,for example, a plurality of turning features configured to turn lightincident thereon at an angle such that light is not guided within thewaveguide and is turned out of the waveguide to the camera. Theoutcoupling optical element 952 may be disposed within an interior ofthe waveguide 940 or may be patterned (e.g., etched) in or on a surface(e.g., major surface) of the waveguide 940. For example, a surfaceholographic or diffractive optical element (e.g., surface reliefgrating) may be fabricated by patterning (e.g., etching) a surface ofthe waveguide or a layer thereon. A volume holographic or diffractiveoptical element may also be formed by changing the index of refractionof material comprising the waveguide or a layer disposed thereon.Depending on the design, the outcoupling optical element 952 may betransmissive or reflective and may operate in transmission orreflection. For example, the outcoupling optical element 952 may includea transmissive or reflective diffractive optical element (e.g., grating)or holographical optical element that operates in transmission orreflection, respectively, e.g., turning light that is transmittedtherethrough or that is reflected therefrom.

The outcoupling optical element 942 may comprise a reflective opticalelement (e.g., mirror). For example, the outcoupling optical element 952may comprise an off-axis reflector. In some designs, the outcouplingoptical element 952 can include a polarization optical element, such asa polarization selective turning element (e.g., polarizer). Accordingly,the polarization selective turning element may include one or morepolarization gratings, diffractive optical elements, and/or holographicoptical elements and may comprise liquid crystal structures such asliquid crystal polarization gratings. In some implementations, forexample, the outcoupling optical element 952 can include liquid crystalpolarization gratings (LCPGs). LCPGs can provide high efficiencydiffraction potentially at broad wavelengths. Likewise, LCPGs may beuseful for outcoupling optical element 952. The LCPG may be polarizationdependent. The LCPG or other types of liquid crystal gratings mayinclude a pattern or arrangement of molecules of liquid crystalconfigured to provide one or more functions such as turn light into awaveguide or out of a waveguide. Accordingly, outcoupling opticalelement 952 may comprise polarization gratings. Additionally oralternatively, outcoupling optical element 952 can comprises liquidcrystal and thus in some implementations may be liquid crystal gratingsor other liquid crystal optical element such as liquid crystaldiffractive optical elements. Additionally or alternatively, theoutcoupling optical element 952 can include a blazed grating. In somedesigns, the outcoupling optical element 952 comprises a liquid crystalreflector, such as a cholesteric liquid crystal reflective lens (e.g.,reflective liquid crystal diffraction lens, Bragg-reflective structure,reflective liquid crystal diffraction grating, etc.). Some nonlimitingexamples of liquid crystal gratings, liquid crystal polarizationgratings and other liquid crystal optical elements are discussed in thefollowing published applications, each of which is hereby incorporatedby reference herein in its entirety and for all purposes: U.S.Publication No. 2018/0143438, titled “MULTILAYER LIQUID CRYSTALDIFFRACTIVE GRATINGS FOR REDIRECTING LIGHT OF WIDE INCIDENT ANGLERANGES,” filed on Nov. 16, 2017; U.S. Publication No. 2018/0143485,titled “SPATIALLY VARIABLE LIQUID CRYSTAL DIFFRACTION GRATINGS,” filedon Nov. 16, 2017; U.S. Publication No. 2018/0143509, titled “WAVEGUIDELIGHT MULTIPLEXER USING CROSSED GRATINGS,” filed on Nov. 16, 2017; U.S.Publication No. 2018/0239147, titled “DISPLAY SYSTEM WITH VARIABLE POWERREFLECTOR,” filed on Feb. 22, 2018; U.S. Publication No. 2018/0239177,titled “VARIABLE-FOCUS VIRTUAL IMAGE DEVICES BASED ON POLARIZATIONCONVERSION,” filed on Feb. 22, 2018; and U.S. Publication No.2018/0164627, titled “DIFFRACTIVE DEVICES BASED ON CHOLESTERIC LIQUIDCRYSTAL,” filed on Dec. 7, 2017. The designs of the outcoupling opticalelement 952, however, are not limited to these and may include othertypes of optical elements, diffractive optical element, liquid crystaloptical element, liquid crystal gratings and liquid crystal polarizationgratings. Further information on examples of cholesteric liquid crystalstructures such as reflectors may also be found below in the sectiontitled “Cholesteric Liquid Crystal Mirror.” As discussed above, otherliquid crystal optical elements as well as other non-liquid crystaloptical elements may be used. Accordingly, many types of couplingoptical elements (e.g. outcoupling optical element 952), diffractiveoptical element, gratings, polarization gratings, etc., may be used,both those described herein as well as other types of gratings,diffractive optical elements, liquid crystal elements, or opticalelements generally. As referred to above, the outcoupling opticalelement 952 may be configured to redirected light guided within thewaveguide 940 at an angle less than the critical angle so as not to beguided within the waveguide by total internal reflection but to beejected out to the camera 920.

In various designs, the coupling optical element 944 may be transparentin the visible spectrum such that the user can see through the couplingoptical element 944 and the eyepiece 950 to the environment in front ofthe user. The incoupling optical element 942 may also turn light in thevisible spectrum, for example, if the incoupling optical element is usedto receive light from the image projector 930 and/or if the illuminationsource 960 is configured to output visible light to illuminate the eye210 with visible light. In some embodiments, the incoupling opticalelement 942 is configured to turn infrared light, for example, if theillumination source 960 is configured to output infrared light toilluminate the eye 210 with infrared light. In some designs such asshown in FIG. 10 , the incoupling optical element 942 may be more medialor nasal than the outcoupling optical element 952. However, in otherdesigns the incoupling optical element 942 may be more lateral ortemporal than the outcoupling optical element 952. In certainimplementations such as shown in FIG. 10 , the outcoupling opticalelement 952 may be adjacent the incoupling optical element 942 althoughnon-adjacent positioning is possible.

The illumination source 960 may be disposed on the same side of theeyepiece 950 as the eye 210 (e.g., rearward or proximal side), as shownin FIG. 10 . (Proximal may refer to the side closest to the eye 210.)Alternatively, the illumination source 960 may be disposed on the sideopposite the eye 210 (e.g., forward or distal side). The illuminationsource 960 may be configured to direct light into at least one of themajor surfaces of the waveguide 940 via the incoupling optical element942. The light source 960 may be configured to emit invisible light(e.g., infrared). The light source 960 may include one or more LEDs. TheLEDs may comprise infrared LEDs. The light source 960 may be configuredto emit coherent light. In some designs, the light source 960 comprisesa laser (e.g., infrared laser). In some designs, the light source 960emits pulsed light. For example, the camera 920 can be configured tocapture an image periodically. Accordingly, the illumination source 960can be pulsed to coincide with the period during which the cameraobtains images. The intensity output from the illumination source 960can be reduced when the camera is not obtaining an image. Byconcentrating the total energy of the illumination on a short timeincreased signal to noise can be obtained while not exposing the eye 210to unsafe intensity levels. In some cases, for example, the camera 920captures one image every 30 milliseconds and the exposure time of thecamera is few milliseconds. The illumination source 960 can beconfigured to output pulses having similar period and duration to matchthat of the camera 920.

In some implementations, different light sources having differentwavelengths are alternately pulsed to provide different wavelengthillumination at different times as discussed below.

The incoupling optical element 942 may be in direct opticalcommunication with the illumination source 960 and/or image projector930, for example, so as to guide light from said image projector 930and/or light source 960 therein. For example, light emitted by the lightsource 960 may be incident on the incoupling optical element 942 beforeoptically interacting with either the coupling optical element 944and/or outcoupling optical element 952.

As shown in FIGS. 11A-11E, light 902 projected from the image projector930 may form an image on the retina. The image projector 930 may includea light source, a modulator, and/or projection optics. The light sourcefor the image projector 930 may comprise one or more LEDs, lasers orother light sources and may comprises one or more visible light sources.The modulator may comprise a spatial light modulator such as a liquidcrystal spatial light modulator. Such a spatial light modulator may beconfigured, for example, to modulate the intensity of light at differentspatial locations. The projection optics may comprise one or morelenses. Other types of image projectors 930 capable of projecting and/orforming images may be employed. For example, the image projector 930 maycomprise a scanning optical fiber.

The image projector 930 and the incoupling optical element 942 may be indirect optical communication with each other. The image projector 930may, for example, be aligned with the incoupling optical element 942into which light from the image projector 930 is directed. In somecases, image projector 930 is disposed adjacent the correspondingincoupling optical element 942 and/or the waveguide 940. The imageprojector 930 may also be disposed in an optical path that includes theincoupling optical element 942, the coupling optical element 944, andthe eye 210.

The image projector 930 may be a separate element than the illuminationsource 960, as shown in FIG. 10 as well as in FIGS. 11A-11E. However, insome cases the image projector 930 may be used as the illuminationsource. For example, in addition to injecting images into the eye 210,the image projector 930 may be used to direct visible and/or infraredlight into the eye to illuminate the eye for image capture.Alternatively, however, one or more separate light sources 960 may beused to illuminate the eye 210 for image capture.

The light emitted by the illumination source 960 may comprise aparticular wavelength range of light such as, for example, invisiblelight. The illumination source 960 may be configured to projectinvisible (e.g., infrared) light onto/into the eye 210 for imaging oneor more parts (e.g., cornea, retina) of the eye 210. In certain exampleimplementations, the light source 960 may be configured to emit light inthe range of between about 850 nm and 940 nm. The light source 960 maybe configured to emit light extending over a wavelength range of atleast about 20 nm. Other ranges are also possible. The wavelength rangeemitted may be 5 nm, 10 nm, 15 nm, 50 nm, 75 nm, 100 nm, 150 nm, 200 nm,or any range between any of these values. The light source 960 may beconfigured to emit light across a broad band of wavelengths, such as anyrange within the infrared spectrum.

The imaging device 920, which may comprise a camera, may comprise adetector array and possibly imaging optics. The detector array maycomprise, for example, a CCD or CMOS detector array and the imagingoptics may comprise one or more lenses. The one or more lenses may havepositive optical power and an associated focal length. In certaindesigns, the camera 920 is focused at infinity. For example, the opticsmay have a focal length, f, and detector array may be disposed adistance away from the optics corresponding to the focal length suchthat objects at a large distance are imaged onto the detector array.Similarly, light from the eye or objects in the environment that iscollimated will be focus on the detector array to form an image of theeye or object thereon.

The imaging device 920 may be disposed on the opposite side of thewaveguide 940 as the illumination source 960 and/or the eye 210. In somedesigns, the imaging device 920 may be disposed on the same side of thewaveguide 940 as the light source 960 and/or eye 210. As shown in FIG.10 , the imaging device 920 may be disposed near a lateral or temporaledge of the eyepiece 950 although other locations are possible.

FIGS. 11A-11E illustrate the operation of the example imaging system 900of FIG. 10 . FIG. 11A shows the illumination source 960 emitting light902 toward the incoupling optical element 942 on the waveguide 940. Asshown, the light 902 can be directed generally at normal incidence tothe eyepiece 950 although other angles are possible. In some designs,the light source 960 is configured to emit collimated light into theeyepiece 950. As shown in FIG. 11B, the illumination light 902 can becoupled into the waveguide 940 via the incoupling optical element 942.In some designs where the incoupling optical element 942 comprises adiffractive optical element (e.g., grating, holographic element) thelight incident thereon is diffracted at an angle greater than thecritical angle of the waveguide to cause the incoupled light 904 to beguided within the eyepiece 950 by total internal reflection (TIR). Insome designs, the incoupling optical element 942 may be configured todirect light toward the coupling optical element 944. The incouplingoptical element 942 may be polarization selective. For example, theincoupling optical element 942 can include a polarization selectiveturning element such a polarization grating like a liquid crystalpolarization grating. FIG. 11C shows how the incoupled light 904propagating through the waveguide 940 by TIR.

FIG. 11D illustrates an example imaging system 900 coupling light out ofthe eyepiece 950. As the incoupled light 904 propagates through thewaveguide 940, some of the light may be incident on the coupling opticalelement 944. The coupling optical element 944 can be configured tocouple the incoupled light 904 out of the eyepiece 950 and toward theuser's eye 210. The coupling optical element 944 may be configured tocouple the light as collimated light toward the eye 210. The couplingoptical element 944 may be tuned to light of a particular wavelengthrange. For example, the coupling optical element 944 may be configuredto couple infrared light (e.g., between about 700 nm and 15000 nm) outof the waveguide 940. In some designs, the coupling optical element 944can be configured to couple multiple wavelengths of light out of theeyepiece 950. For example, the coupling optical element 944 may be tunedfor both infrared and visible light. The coupling optical element 944can also be configured to couple light into the waveguide 940, asdescribed more fully below.

The coupling optical element 944 can be configured to increase one ormore dimensions of an eyebox for a user. For example, the one or moredimensions may be measured along a first axis (e.g., x axis). Theeyepiece 950 may further include an orthogonal pupil expander (OPE). TheOPE may have at least one light redirecting element disposed on or inthe waveguide (e.g., on one of the major surfaces) or the OPE may bedisposed within the waveguide 940. The OPE may include features similaror identical to those described above for light distributing elements730, 740, 750 above. In some implementations, the light redirectingelement may comprise a diffractive optical element. The OPE may beconfigured to increase a dimension of the eyebox along a second axis(e.g., y axis) orthogonal to the first axis.

FIG. 11D shows some of the light exiting the eyepiece 950 toward theuser's eye 210. In some designs, the coupling optical element 944 isconfigured such that incoupled light 904 that is incident on thecoupling optical element 944 at various portions of the coupling opticalelement 944 along the first axis (e.g., parallel to the x-axis) exitsthe eyepiece 950 at each portion of the coupling optical element 944along the first axis. This may provide a user with a light forprojecting images or illuminating the eye for different eye positions orlocations.

As shown in FIGS. 11D-11E, the coupling optical element 944 may beconfigured to couple the incoupled light 904 out of the eyepiece 950 ascollimated light. This light may also be directed in general near normalrelative to a major surface of the eyepiece 950 and/or waveguide 940.The collimated light may be directed into the eye and focus by the eye(e.g., the cornea and natural lens of the eye) onto the retina. Thislight 908 incident on the retina may be provide illumination for imagingthe retina and/or providing image content to the eye. Some of this light908, for example, may be reflected or scatter off the retina, exitingthe eye and providing for images of the retina to be captured. The lightsource 960 may be an extended light source such that the light willilluminate a region of the retina.

FIGS. 12A-12E illustrate how the imaging system 900 of FIGS. 11A-11E mayadditionally or alternatively be used for image collection of the eye210. FIG. 12A shows light 910 reflected from the retina exiting the eye210. As shown, the light 910 scattered or reflected from the retina thatpasses through the natural lens of the eye, the pupil in the eye and thecornea from may be collimated. This light may also be incident on theeyepiece 950 at normal incidence (e.g., at a right angle to a majorsurface of the waveguide 940 and/or coupling optical element 944). Thecoupling optical element 944 may be configured to couple the light 910reflected from the retina into the waveguide 940.

FIG. 12B illustrates an example imaging system 900 as it couples lightinto the eyepiece 950. The coupling optical element 944 may include aturning feature such as a diffractive optical element, or otherstructures that redirect the light at an angle greater than the criticalangle so as to be guided within the waveguide 940. The coupling opticalelement 944 may be configured to direct the incoupled light 914generally toward the light source 960 and/or the imaging device 920. Thecoupling optical element 944 can be configured to couple less than afraction of this light propagating toward the camera 920 back out of thewaveguide 940. For example, a partially reflective element (e.g.,semi-transparent mirror) may be disposed on or in the waveguide 940 suchthat a portion of the incoupled light 914 continues to propagate withinthe waveguide 940 by total internal reflection while reducing leakage ofthe incoupled light 914 out of the waveguide 940 along portions of thewaveguide 940 where the coupling optical element 944 is disposed. Theportion of light that does not leak out may be any fraction between 0and 1. For example, the portion may be 0.90, where 90% of the light rayspropagating through the waveguide 940 along the coupling optical element944 are maintained within the waveguide 940 at each reflection of thelight rays. Other portions are possible (e.g., 0.10, 0.20, 0.30, 0.40,0.50, 0.60, 0.70, 0.80, or any range between any of these values). Suchpartially reflective element(s) can similarly be used in implementationsdescribed below.

As shown in FIG. 12C, collimated incoupled light 914 may continue topropagate through the waveguide 940 toward the imaging device 920. FIG.12D shows how some of the incoupled light 914 can continue to propagateuntil it is incident on one or more outcoupling optical elements 952. Inorder to reduce the amount of leakage of incoupled light 914 out of theincoupling optical element 942, the incoupling optical element 942 canbe configured to couple little of this light propagating toward thecamera 920 back out of the waveguide. For example, a partiallyreflective element (e.g., semi-transparent mirror) may be disposed on orin the waveguide 940 such that the a portion of the incoupled light 914continues to propagate within the waveguide 940 by total internalreflection while reducing leakage of the incoupled light 914 out of thewaveguide 940 along portions of the waveguide 940 where the incouplingoptical element 942 is disposed. The portion of light that does not leakout may be any fraction between 0 and 1. For example, the portion may be0.90, where 90% of the light rays propagating through the waveguide 940along the coupling optical element 944 are maintained within thewaveguide 940 at each reflection of the light rays. Other portion may bepossible (e.g., 0.10, 0.20, 0.30, 0.40, 0.50, 0.60, 0.70, 0.80, or anyrange between any of these values). Such partially reflective element(s)can similarly be used in implementations described below.

As shown in FIG. 12E, the outcoupling optical element 952 can beconfigured to couple light guided within the waveguide 940 out of thewaveguide 940 and to the imaging device 920. As a result, lightpropagating in the waveguide 940 that is incident on the outcouplingelement 952 may be redirected so as to be ejected out of the waveguide940, for example, out of a major surface of the waveguide 940 (e.g., theforward or rearward side of the waveguide 940) and directed on theimaging device 920. The outcoupling optical element 952 may beconfigured to direct the light 926 to exit the waveguide 940perpendicular (e.g., normal) to the major surface of waveguide 940. Insome designs, the outcoupling optical element 952 is configured todirect collimated light 924 onto the imaging device 920 at normalincidence to a light sensitive portion of the imaging device 920. Asdiscussed above, the camera 920 may be infinity focused, for example,the imaging optics may be configured to focus collimated light onto thedetector array.

Accordingly, the waveguide 940 may be configured to guide light coupledfrom the user's eye 210 into the waveguide 940 to be received by theimaging device 920 (e.g., camera) so as to capture an image of at leasta portion of the eye 210 of the user. The same waveguide 940 may beconfigured to guide light coupled from the image projector 930 such thatlight from the image projector 930 can be directed to the user's eye 210such that the image from the image projector 930 is in the vision fieldof the user. In some implementations, the same waveguide is configuredto guide light coupled from the illumination source 960 such that lightfrom the illumination source can be directed to the user's eye 210 toilluminate the eye such that an image of the eye can be captured by thecamera 920.

In some implementations, the same coupling optical element 944 can beconfigured to (i) couple light from the user's eye 210 into thewaveguide 940 to be received by the imaging device 920 and (ii) couplelight from the image projector 930 out from the waveguide 940 to theuser's eye 210 to project image content into the user's vision field. Insome implementations, the same coupling optical element 944 can beconfigured to couple light from the illumination source 960 out of thewaveguide to the user's eye 210 such that light from the illuminationsource can illuminate the eye.

In other designs, different waveguides can be used and/or differentcoupling optical elements 944 can be used. In some designs for example,a first waveguide 940 may be configured to guide light coupled from theuser's eye 210 to be received by the camera 920 so as to capture animage of at least a portion of the eye 210 of the user and a secondwaveguide may be configured to guide light coupled from the imageprojector 930 such that light from the image projector 930 can bedirected to the user's eye 210. The first and second waveguides may bestacked on top of one another. Another waveguide may in addition or inthe alternative be configured to guide light coupled from theillumination source 960 such that light from the illumination source canbe directed to the user's eye 210 to illuminate the eye.

Also, in some implementations, a first coupling optical element 944 canbe configured to (i) couple light from the user's eye 210 into thewaveguide 940 to be received by the imaging device 920 and (ii) couplelight from the image projector 930 out from the waveguide 940 to theuser's eye 210 to project image content into the user's vision field.Another coupling optical element may in addition or in the alternativebe configured to coupled light from the illumination source 960 out ofthe waveguide to the user's eye 210 such that light from theillumination source can illuminate the eye.

In some designs, the coupling optical element 944 can include aplurality of diffractive optical elements (DOEs). For example, a firstDOE can be configured to couple light from the user's eye 210 into thewaveguide 940 to be received by the imaging device 920. A second DOE canbe configured to couple light from the image projector 930 out of thewaveguide 940 to the user's eye 210 to project image content into theuser's vision field. Optionally, a third DOE can be configured to couplelight from the light source 960 out of the waveguide 940 to the user'seye 210 to illuminate the eye. The first and second (and possibly third)DOEs can be stacked, e.g., in some implementations such that light fromthe environment in front of the user passes through the first DOE and isthen incident on the second DOE and then incident on the third DOE andincident on the user's eye. The order, however, may be different.

In some designs, the first and second DOEs are integrated in a singleelement or volume of the waveguide 940. In some implementations, forexample, both the first and second DOEs are superimposed on each other(e.g., occupy the same or approximately the same volume) within thewaveguide 2102. For example, the first and second DOE may be recorded inthe same medium.

As described above, image capture of the eye, e.g., of the retina, canfacilitate eye tracking. FIG. 13A, for example, illustrates the imagingsystem 900 configured to image various portions of the eye 210 (e.g.,retina), for example, at different times when the eye is in differentpositions. Stages A and B may refer to images of the eye 210 duringdifferent orientations of the eye. FIG. 13A shows imaging of the eye 210and the results thereof during both stage A and stage B imaging.

In some implementations, the light emission 928 (e.g., from anillumination source 960 such as described above or from one or moreilluminations sources configured and/or located differently) can be usedto obtain one or more images of the retina 962, as shown by FIG. 13A.The image of the retina 962 may comprise one or more regions 964, 966that are imaged during different orientations of the eye 210. FIG. 13Ashows two regions 964, 966 of the image of the retina 962. For example,the region 964 of retina imaged in stage A may be imaged while the eye210 is directed at an angle normal to the waveguide 940. The image datafor the region 966 of retina imaged in stage B may be obtained while theeye 210 is oriented at an acute angle with the waveguide 940. Using oneor more orientations of the eye 210 during one or more stages ofimaging, a composite image or map of the retina 962 may be obtained.Processing electronics or a processor, such as data module 140 (see FIG.2 ), may be used to find overlapping image data between two neighboringregions. Using the overlapping regional image data, a composite image orof the retina 962 can be determined. A larger size (e.g., full-size)composite image or map of the user's retina can be stored.

As described herein, the head mounted display can be used to map auser's eye retina based on the direction that user's eye is directed. Toprovide a realistic and intuitive interaction with objects in the user'senvironment using eye gaze and/or to identify a wearer of the headmounted display device, the head mounted display system can use retinalmapping to incorporate a uniqueness of a user's eye features and otherconditions that may have some effect on eye measurements. For example,the images may be identified based on positions of blood vessels in thecorresponding retinal image.

Retinal mapping can involve a process for enabling a computing device tolearn how to associate a user's eye gaze (e.g., as identified in retinalimages) with gaze points in a 2D or 3D space. An eye gaze may beassociated with a single point in the 2D or 3D space. An eye gaze canalso be associated with multiple points in the space, which can describea movement of a virtual object (e.g., a series of points, a location ofa moving image).

The head mounted display system can determine a user's eye gaze based onretinal images. The head mounted display system can obtain retinalimages using sensors (e.g., eye cameras such as the imaging device 920).The head mounted display system can image one or both eyes of the userwhile the user changes his or her eye gazes (such as, e.g., when theuser is looking around to follow a moving or shifting calibration targetor fixation target). To map a user's retina, the head mounted displaysystem can present a virtual target, e.g., a fixation target, for theuser to look at. The virtual target may be associated with one or moreknown points of gaze in the 2D or 3D space. While the user is looking atthe target, the head mounted display system can acquire retinal image(s)and associate the image(s) with gaze point(s). The head mounted displaysystem can calculate and/or generate a mapping matrix based on theassociations of respective retinal images and points of gaze associatedwith the target.

The retinal mapping result can reflect uniqueness in each person's eyes.For example, the head mounted display system can generate a mappingmatrix customized to one or both eyes of a specific individual. Forexample, the users may have different amounts of eye movements or eyegazes in response to a specific target. Additionally or alternatively,the user may have a different position, size, shape, and/or orientationof blood vessels in the retina. As a result, by generating a calibrationresult specific to an individual user, the head mounted display systemmay allow more accurate user interactions with eye gazes and/or mayallow for identification a particular user.

Accordingly, when a user puts on the head mounted display device, thesystem can detect whether the user is a previous user or a new user. Aconfusion matrix can be calculated where a score for a particular eyegaze image stored in the system memory is compared to a correspondingimage of the current user. The confusion matrix can include a comparisonscore for a plurality of eye gazes and associated retinal images. Basedon the comparison scores, the system may be able to make a determinationwith regard to an identity of the user (e.g., whether the user is thesame as the individual for which the stored retinal images or compositemap are associated) and/or a confidence level for the determination. Theconfidence level may, for example, include an identity coefficient.Stored images, for example, a composite image or map, may be comparedwith later obtained images referred to as instantaneous or real-timeimages obtained for a current user. The system may provide an alert ifthe system detects that the user is a new user or may take other action.

The system may apply filtering such as digital filtering or imageprocessing to the images of the retina captured by the camera. Suchfiltering or imaging processing, may for example, enhance features thatmay be used for identification, stitching, assembling a compositeimages, eye tracking, etc. Such filtering or image processing maycomprise edge enhancement. Such a filter may comprise, for example, aFrangi filter although other types of filters may be used. Such a filteror processing (e.g., edge enhancement or a Frangi filter) can be used toenhance and/or detect images features such as vessels or tubularstructures or fibers in retinal images.

FIG. 13B illustrates a pattern of sequentially displayed fixationtargets that can be used in the retinal mapping process. These virtualtargets on which a user's eye will direct their gaze can cause the eye'sgaze to be redirected to a variety of different directions during whichthe retina can be imaged. The resultant images associated with thedifferent gaze directions correspond to non-identical portions of theretina. As discussed above, when the eye is gazing in differentdirections to view differently located fixation targets on the display,images captured by the camera include different portions of the retina.These images can be assembled to form a larger map or composite image ofthe retina.

FIG. 13B shows a virtual target at sixteen different location in auser's field of view (FOV) 1200. In various implementations, the virtualtarget would be presented at a given location at a given time. One ormore retinal images would be obtained during a time when the virtualtarget is presented at that particular location to a user. This image orthese images may be associated with that target position and/or acorresponding gaze direction. Greater or fewer target locations may beused. In the example shown in FIG. 13B, the sixteen targets locations1202 a-1202 p are shown. More or less target locations may be used. Thetarget locations may also be different. The order at which the targetsare presented at the different locations may vary. For example, thetarget may move in a raster pattern from the left to the right side ofthe field of view of the user, back to from the right to the left, andagain from the left to the right, lowering the position of the target inthe field of view with each lateral pass across the field of view.However, other patterns and approaches are possible. Likewise, thetarget can be rendered identically or differently at the differentlocations. For example, the target rendered may be different sizes,shapes, colors, etc. The targets can be rendered sequentially to a userduring the eye tracking calibration process. For example, as discussedabove the head mounted display system may render target in a serpentinepattern. For example, the target 1202 a may be followed by 1202 b, then1202 c, then 1202 d, then 1202 h, then 1202 g, and so forth. Otherpatterns are possible. For example, the target could be displayed inmore random or non-sequential patterns. In some embodiments, a singletarget is displayed to the user, and the target moves around the user'sfield of view (for example, passing or temporarily stopping at thepositions 1202 a-1202 p during the target's movement). The head mounteddisplay system can acquire an image of the user's retina(s) while theuser is looking at these targets. For example, the head mounted displaysystem can acquire a first image when the user is looking at the targetat the first location 1202 a while acquiring a second image when theuser is looking at the target at a second location 1202 b, and a thirdimage when the user is looking at the target at a third location 1202 c,and so forth. The wearable system can associate the first image to thefirst position 1202 a and associate the second image with the secondposition 1202 b, and the third image with the third position 1202 c, andso forth. Neighboring images may be stitched together in a database tocreate a full or partial retinal map. For example, two image can bestitched together in appropriate registration using features or portionsof the feature (e.g., blood vessels or portions thereof) that are commonto the multiple images. In various implementations, adjacent targetpositions would produce overlapping images that can be registered andstitched together. For example, target position 1202 a and targetposition 1202 b as well as target position 1202 b and target position1202 c may produce overlapping and adjacent retinal images that can bestitched with each other. Accordingly, a number of different retinalimages may be obtained with different eye gazes so as to assemble alarger image (e.g., a composite image or map) of the retina.

As discussed above, eye tracking can be performed using the compositeretinal image or map. For example, after the target is no longerdisplayed, the user may move their eye gaze about as the user looks atdifferent real objects in front of the user and head mounted display oraugmented reality (virtual) image content displayed by the head mounteddisplay. One or more retinal images may be obtained at these times. Theterm “instantaneous” or “real-time” images may be used herein todescribe these images obtained subsequent to calibration that can beused for eye tracking (or other purpose such as obtaining biometricdata). These “instantaneous” or “real-time” images likely correspond toa portion of the composite retinal image or map. The system may beconfigured to sufficiently match this “instantaneous” or “real-time”retinal image with a portion of the composite retinal image or retinalmap. Such matching may be based on features or portions of features(blood vessels or portions thereof) that are common to both the“instantaneous” or “real-time” retinal image and the portion of thecomposite retinal image or map. Based on the location the portion of thecomposite retinal image or map to which this “instantaneous” or“real-time” retinal image coincides, a gaze direction may be deduced.Different gaze directions will result in retinal images that correspondto different portions of the retinal map. Accordingly, identifying thelocation of the “instantaneous” or “real-time” retinal image on thecomposite retinal image or map will provide information as to thedirection of the user's gaze. Eye tracking, for example, tracking themovement of the eye and the change in eye gaze may be performed usingsuch or similar methods. As discussed above, edge enhancement, edgedetection, or other digital filtering and/or processing may be used toenhance and/or correlate features of different images with the compositeretinal image or retinal map.

In various implementations after completion of the initial calibrationprocess where the virtual target or fixation target is displayed (e.g.,at a plurality of locations) to assemble a composite retinal image ormap, the composite retinal image or map can still be refined. Forexample, as additional retinal images are obtained, the compositeretinal image or map can be further refined or improved using theadditional images. Accordingly as additional “instantaneous” or“real-time” retinal images are obtained, for example for the purpose ofproviding eye tracking, the composite retinal image or map can befurther refined or improved using the “instantaneous” or “real-time”. Asa user continues to look at various positions in the display (with orwithout aid of a calibration target), the retinal composite image or mapmay be further refined using additional images are acquired subsequentto the initial calibration where the virtual target or fixation targetwas displayed. The quality of the composite retinal image or map maytherefore be increased.

Additional non-limiting examples of how eye tracking may be accomplishedand/or a composite retinal image or map may be produced and retinalimages used are described in U.S. Publication No. 2017/0205875, titled“EYE IMAGE COLLECTION,” filed on Jan. 17, 2017, the disclosure of whichis hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

Accordingly, as discussed above larger portions of the retina may berecorded and mapped by obtaining retinal images and/or other images ofthe eye using imaging systems such as described herein and such imagesmay facilitate eye tracking. For example, an image of the eye 210 shownin FIG. 13A may be captured when the eye is in an arbitrary position.The processing electronics or a processor (such as the same or differentone described above as forming the composite image) may then comparecaptured images of the user's retina in real time to the storedcomposite or larger size (e.g., full-size) image of the user's retina totrack eye movement. A given image of the user's retina captured in realtime may show a specific portion of the user's retina. As describedabove, by comparing such a captured image to the stored image of theuser's mapping a larger portion of the user's retina, the system candetermine which portion of the user's retina is shown in the capturedimage, and can thereby determine the position/orientation of the eyethat would produce such an image. See for example FIG. 13A, which showstwo different images of portions of the retina that are produced whenthe eye is in two different positions and/or orientations. Accordingly,the position and/or orientation of the eye may be determined bycapturing different images of the retina and determining which portionof the retina is visible. Such determination may be performed even if acomposite image is not formed but rather multiple images of the retinafor different eye positions/orientations are recorded and stored in adatabase. When a future image of the retina is obtained, that image maybe compared to images in the database of stored images to determinewhich image in the database resembles the image of the eye recentlyobtained. Matching the recent image to one or more of the images in thedatabase having associated positions and/or orientations associated withthem can enable determination of the orientation and/or position of themore recent image. Other approaches to eye tracking may be used based onthe images captured using the designs described herein.

As described herein, the retinal images may be employed for otherpurposes as well. For example, the retinal images may be used to verifythat the user is the same user for which the composite retinal image ormap was obtained. An image of the retina that is obtained when a user iswearing the head mounted display system (e.g., during the calibrationprocess and/or during later use) may be compared with a previouslyobtained composite retinal image or map (e.g., created a prior day orwhen the head mounted display was previously booted up) that is stored.If the recently obtained retinal image does not match a portion of thecomposite retinal image or map sufficiently enough, a conclusion may bemade that the current user is different than the previous user (e.g.,for which the composite virtual image or map was created). Such methodsmay be used for security, e.g., to verify that the current user of thehead mounted display device is the owner or typical user of the device.Accordingly, biometric data obtained via retinal imaging may be used forsecurity purposes.

The retinal imaging may be used as well to collect biometric data formonitoring the user's health. Medically related data may be obtainedfrom the retinal images. Such medical data may be useful for monitoringthe health of the user.

Although various applications of eye imaging, such as eye tracking,collection of biometric data for heath monitoring and for security arediscussed herein in the context of retinal imaging, imaging other partsof the user, for example, of the user's eye may be employed for theseand other purposes.

Although the eyepiece 950 is described above as capable of beingutilized to facilitate imaging of the eye, the eyepiece can also be usedto image the world in front of the user. FIGS. 14A-14B, for example,illustrate an example imaging system 900 that can be used to image aportion of an environment in front of the user and/or objects in theportion of the environment. The imaging system 900 used may be a similarsystem as described for FIGS. 11A-11E and/or for FIGS. 12A-12E exceptthat light is collected by the eyepiece 950 from the environment forwardthe eyepiece and the user. FIG. 14A, for example, illustrates light 970from the environment that is reflected off and/or emitted by one or morephysical objects 972 in the environment forward the user and eyepiece950. As shown, the light 970 from the environment may be approximatelycollimated (e.g., at infinity), for example because the physical object972 in the environment may be located at a sufficiently large distancefrom the imaging system 900 for the light rays reaching the imagingsystem 900 to be collimated or approximately collimated. In someimplementations, the imaging system 900 may be configured to image theenvironment and/or objects in the environment without the use of anyoptical elements having optical power (e.g., lenses, mirrors) in theimaging system 900.

The imaging system 900 shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B is similar to theimaging systems described above. The imaging system includes theeyepiece 950 comprising one or more waveguides 940 including thecoupling optical element 944 configured to direct light from an imageprojector 930 (not shown) into the eye 210 to form images therein. Theone or more waveguides may include a plurality of waveguides (e.g., astack of waveguides) configured to incouple/outcouple a plurality ofcorresponding colors/wavelengths. Each waveguide in a stack ofwaveguides may be configured to direct light of a particular color(e.g., red, green, blue). For example, a distalmost waveguide (e.g.,stack of waveguides) may be configured for visible light (e.g., red,blue, green) such that the waveguide is configured to incouple andoutcouple the same wavelength(s) of visible light. Additionally oralternatively, a waveguide configured to incouple and outcoupleinvisible (e.g., infrared) light may be disposed proximal the eye 210.Such a plurality of waveguides corresponding to the waveguide 940 may beused in any other implementation described herein. The imaging system900 may also include the imaging device (e.g., camera) 920 andoutcoupling optical element 952 configured to turn light reflected fromthe eye 210 that is propagated within the waveguide 940 to the camera.In FIGS. 14A and 14B, the illumination source 960 is excluded since anillumination source may not be needed to image the environment in frontof the user. However, an illumination source (e.g., the light source 960described above) may be used in certain designs.

The eyepiece 950, waveguide 940, coupling optical element 944,outcoupling optical element 952 and camera 920 may be the same orsimilar to that describe above. For example, the coupling opticalelement 944 may be in physical engagement with the waveguide 940. Forexample, the coupling optical element 944 and/or outcoupling opticalelement 952 may be disposed in an optical path between the environmentin front of the eyepiece 950 and camera 920 such that light from theenvironment is coupled into the waveguide 940 via the coupling opticalelement 944 and coupled out of the waveguide via the outcoupling opticalelement to be incident on the camera 210 (for example to form an imageof at least a portion of the environment). The coupling optical element944 may comprise a plurality of turning features configured to turnlight guided within the waveguide out of the waveguide or turn lightincident on the coupling optical element 944 at an angle into thewaveguide to be guided therein by total internal reflection. Theoutcoupling optical element 952 may comprise a plurality of turningfeatures configured to turn light (from the environment) that is guidedwithin the waveguide at an angle such that the light is not guided inthe waveguide by total internal reflection but is direct out toward thecamera. The coupling optical element 944, outcoupling optical element952 and the turning features associated with each may be in physicalengagement with the waveguide 940. For example, the coupling opticalelement 944 and/or outcoupling optical element 952 may comprise one ormore holographic or diffractive optical elements (e.g., surface reliefgratings) patterned (e.g., etched) in or on the waveguide 940. Thecoupling optical element 944 and/or outcoupling optical element 952 maycomprise a layer disposed on the waveguide 940 or may be formed be inthe waveguide 940. For example, a volume holographic or diffractiveoptical element may be formed by changing the index of refraction ofmaterial comprising the waveguide or a layer disposed thereon.Accordingly, the coupling optical element 944 and/or outcoupling opticalelement 952 may be disposed in the volume of the waveguide 940 or alayer disposed thereon. Depending on the design, the coupling opticalelement 944 and/or outcoupling optical element 952 may be transmissiveor reflective and may operate in transmission or reflection. Forexample, the coupling optical element 944 and/or outcoupling opticalelement 952 may include a transmissive or reflective diffractive opticalelement (e.g., grating) or holographical optical element that operatesin transmission or reflection respectively, e.g., turning light via thatis transmitted therethrough or that is reflected therefrom. The couplingoptical element 944 and/or outcoupling optical element 952 can include apolarization optical element, such as a polarization selective turningelement (e.g., polarizer). The polarization selective turning elementmay include one or more polarization gratings, diffractive opticalelements, and/or holographic optical elements and may comprise liquidcrystal structures such as liquid crystal polarization gratings. In someimplementations, the reflective optical element may include a reflector(e.g., mirror). Other elements, such as for example the waveguide 940may be similar to that described above as well.

FIG. 14B illustrates the operation of the imaging system 900 shown inFIG. 14A. Light 970 from the environment is coupled by the couplingoptical element 944 into the waveguide 940. The coupling optical element944 may be configured to turn collimated light at an angle that isgreater than the critical angle of the waveguide 940 such that at leasta portion of this collimated light is guided within the waveguide bytotal internal reflection toward the camera 920. The outcoupling opticalelement 952 can be configured to receive at least a portion of the lightfrom the environment in front of the user that is coupled into thewaveguide 940 via the coupling optical element 944 and guided therein.The outcoupling optical element 952 may be configured to couple theincoupled light out from the waveguide 940 to the camera 920 such thatimages of the environment may be captured by the camera 920. The imagesof the environment may be passed to processing electronics, (e.g., oneor more processors), such as data module 140 (see FIG. 2 ). The datamodule 140 may be configured to reproduce a modified image of theenvironment in an augmented reality context. The processing electronicsmay be in communication with the camera 920 via a wired or wirelesselectronic signal. Additionally or alternatively, the processingelectronics may communicate with the camera 920 using one or more remotereceivers. The processing electronics may reside remotely (e.g., cloudcomputing devices, remote server, etc.).

This imaging system 900 may therefore be used for directly imaging theenvironment, which may be useful for a variety of reasons. For example,imaging the environment can be used to determine where to placeaugmented reality image content with respect to objects in theenvironment. For example, imaging the environment may provide thelocation of a table such that the head mounted display may render animage of person standing next to the table instead of on the table or inthe table. The imaging system 900 described for imaging the environmentmay also be used to image the eye 210, such as is described for FIGS.10, 11A-11E, and/or 12A-12E.

It may be desirable to image a wide view of the environment using theimaging system 900. FIG. 14C schematically illustrates an imaging system900 for collecting light from the environment using a powered opticalelement or lens such as refractive optical element 980 (e.g., a widefield of view lens) forward the eyepiece. The refractive optical element980 may have a positive optical power. The refractive optical element980 (e.g., positive lens) converges collimated light 970 from theenvironment toward the waveguide 940. Other types of lenses than thelens shown in FIG. 14C may be employed. Light that is transmitted (notshown) may pass through a powered optical element or lens such asrefractive optical element 990 (e.g., negative lens) that is configuredfor a negative power equal and opposite of the refractive opticalelement 980. The negative lens 990 may have a similar or the sameoptical power as the positive lens 980 to offset or counter the opticalpower of the positive lens or a portion thereof. In this way, light fromthe environment (e.g., distal of the waveguide 940) may pass through thenegative lens 990, the eyepiece 950, and the positive lens 980 withsubstantially no net change in optical power introduced by these twolenses to the eye. The negative lens 990 may be configured to offset orcounter the optical power of the positive lens 980 such that a user'swill not experience the power of the positive lens when viewing theenvironment in front of the eyepiece 950. The negative lens 990 willalso counter the effect of the positive lens 980 to invert images ofobject in the environment in front of the wearer. Some light 970 fromthe environment may be incoupled into the waveguide 940 by the couplingoptical element 944, in spite of some of the rays of light beingconvergent. The incoupled light incident on the outcoupling opticalelement 952 may be ejected out of the waveguide 940.

Implementations (e.g., those described by FIGS. 14A-14C) may be usedoutside an augmented reality context. For example, it is intended thatan imaging system 900 configured to image the environment be implementedwithin a wearable device, such as, for example, eyeglasses (includingunpowered glasses) or bifocals. Such an imaging system 900 may notrequire an image projector 930 and/or light source 960. Additionally oralternatively, such an imaging system 900 may not require an incouplingoptical element configured for a corresponding image projector 930and/or light source 960.

It may be advantageous to implement such an imaging system 900 forimaging the environment on a viewing screen (e.g., television screen,computer screen), such as a handheld device (e.g., cell phone, tablet).The imaging system 900 could improve video chat capabilities. Forexample, a viewer who is seeing a chat partner look into the screen mayappear to be looking directly at the viewer. This would be possiblesince the light rays captured by the imaging system 900 would becaptured in the same region where the user is looking (e.g., as opposedto viewing a screen but having the light rays captured by a separateoutward-facing camera positioned at a different location).

In implementations where the imaging system 900 of FIG. 14C is also usedto image the eye 210, a light source 960 and/or image projector 930 maybe configured to inject light into the waveguide 940. Because the lightreflected from the eye that is incoupled into the waveguide will passthrough the refractive optical element 990 (e.g., negative lens), apositive powered refractive optical element may be disposed between thelight source 960 and/or image projector 930 and between the waveguide940. The positive lens can be configured to offset or counter anyoptical power provided by the refractive optical element 990 before theincoupled light from the light source and/or light projector is incidenton the eye 210. Other types of lenses than shown in FIG. 14C may be usesas the optical element 990. Alternatively or additionally, processingelectronics in communication with the light source and/or imageprojector can be configured to alter an image sufficient to present tothe user an undistorted image after the light has passed through therefractive optical element 990. Corresponding incoupling opticalelement, outcoupling optical element, and/or coupling optical elementmay be configured to operate on non-collimated light (e.g., divergent,convergent light) in some designs.

In various implementations, the same waveguide 940 may be used to (i)propagate light from the environment in front of the eyepiece 950 andthe user to the camera 940 and (ii) to propagate light from the imageprojector 930 to the eye 210 to form image content therein. Using thesame waveguide 940 may simplify the system and/or the eyepiece and maymake the system and/or eyepiece more compact possibly providing areduced form factor. Reducing the thickness of the eyepiece 950 byreducing the number of waveguide 940 may be advantageous for otherreasons as well. Lower cost and a more simplified manufacturing processmay be some such advantages.

Also in various designs, the same or different imaging system may beused in the same head mounted display to image the eye by propagatinglight from the eye via a waveguide in the eyepiece 950 to the camera 940such as, for example, described above. Such systems may also use theeyepiece to transfer light from an illumination source to the eye 210 toilluminate the eye. In some designs, the eyepiece may additionally beused to propagate light from the image projector 930 to the eye 210 toform image content therein. Using the eyepiece to assist in imaging theenvironment and image the eye (and possibly to illuminate the eye) maysimplify the system and/or may make the system more compact possiblyproviding a reduced form factor.

Moreover, in some implementations, the same waveguide 940 may be used to(i) propagate light from the environment in front of the eyepiece 950 tothe camera 940 and (ii) to propagate light from the eye 210 to thecamera to capture images of the eye. The same waveguide may be used topropagate light from the image projector 930 to the eye 210 to formimage content therein and/or to propagate light from the illuminationsource 960 to the eye 210 to illuminate the eye for image capture. Usingthe same waveguide 940 may simplify the system and/or the eyepiece andmay make the system and/or eyepiece more compact possibly providing areduced form factor. Reducing the thickness of the eyepiece 950 byreducing the number of waveguide 940 may be advantage for other reasonsas well. Lower cost and a more simplified manufacturing process may besome such advantages.

Similarly, in addition to coupling light from the environment into thewaveguide 940, the same coupling optical element 944 may be configuredto direct light from the image projector 930 to the eye 210 to formimage content therein and/or light from the eye into the waveguide 940to be guided therein to the camera 920. Additionally or in thealternative, the same coupling optical element 944 may be configured tocouple light from the illumination source 960 guided within thewaveguide 940 out of the waveguide to the user's eye 210.

As discussed above, one or more of the coupling optical element 944, thein-coupling optical element 942, or the out-coupling optical element 952may comprises polarization selective coupling elements. Accordingly, invarious designs, light input into eyepiece 950 or waveguide 940 ispolarized so as to acted on appropriately by the polarization selectiveturning elements.

Accordingly, in some embodiments the illumination source 960 comprises apolarized light source of suitable polarization to be acted on properlyby the polarization selective coupling/turning elements.

One or more polarization specific optical filters and polarizationmodifying elements may be included in various imaging systems 900, suchas those where the image projector 930 and/or light source 960 aredisposed directly opposite each other through the waveguide 940. Thepolarization sensitive elements may be helpful in reducing directionlight emission into the imaging device 920 and/or to reduce saturationof the imaging device 920, for example, in configurations where theseelements are aligned on opposite sides of the waveguide 940 at the samelateral position. FIGS. 15A-15B show such a configuration. The lightsource 960 such as shown in FIG. 15A can be configured to direct lightthrough a polarization specific optical filter 982 such as a polarizer(e.g., a linear polarizer) and/or through a polarization modifyingelement 986 configured to alter a polarization state of incident light,such as a polarization rotator. A retarder such as a half wave retardermay, for example, rotate linear polarization. Accordingly, anappropriately oriented half wave retarder or half wave plate may rotates-polarized light to p-polarized light or vice versa. Accordingly, invarious implementations, the polarization specific optical filter 982and/or a polarization modifying element 986 are disposed in an opticalpath between the light source 960 and the in-coupling optical element942 so as to provide the properly oriented polarization to thein-coupling optical element. In some implementations, the imaging system900 does not include polarization modifying elements but includesproperly oriented polarization optical filters, such as polarizers.

The light emitted by the light source 960 may pass through anarrangement of optical elements in a particular order. For example, asshown in FIG. 15A, the light may pass first from the light source 960through the polarization specific optical filter 982 (e.g., polarizer)and then through the polarization modifying element 986 (e.g. rotator).After the light has passed through the polarization modifying element986, the light may be incident on an incoupling optical element 942,which may direct the light into the waveguide 940 to be guided therein.

For example, the light source 960 may be configured to emit light of amixed polarization (e.g., s-polarization and p-polarization). Thepolarization specific optical filter 982 may be configured to transmitonly light of a first polarization state (e.g., p-polarization). As thelight continues, the polarization modifying element 986 may beconfigured to change the polarization state of the light (e.g., fromp-polarized to s-polarized). The incoupling optical element may beconfigured to turn s-polarized light into an angle that is greater thanthe critical angle of the waveguide such that the s-polarized light isguided within the waveguide. The incoupled light 904 may besubstantially polarized in the second polarization (s-polarization) asit propagates through the waveguide 940. The coupling optical element944 may be configured to turn light only of the second polarizationstate (s-polarization). The coupling optical element 944 may beconfigured to couple the incoupled light 904 out of the waveguide 940and to the eye 210 to provide illumination for image capture.

In order to prevent direct illumination (e.g., saturation) of theimaging device 920, a polarization modifying element 958 and/or apolarization specific optical filter 984 may be disposed in or on thewaveguide 940 such that only light of a certain polarization state(e.g., p-polarized) can pass through the polarization specific opticalfilter 984 and to the imaging device 920. The polarization modifyingelement 958 (e.g., half waveplate) may be configured to change the stateof the polarization (e.g., from s-polarized to p-polarized). Thepolarization specific optical filter 984 may be configured to transmitonly light of a certain polarization (e.g., p-polarized light)therethrough. In this way, light passing through the polarizationspecific optical filter 982 will not be configured to transmit directlythrough the polarization specific optical filter 984. In any of theimplementations above (e.g., where the image projector 930 and/or thelight source 960 are on the same optical axis as shown in FIG. 15A),such as in FIGS. 10, 11A-11E, and 12A-12E, the configuration of thepolarization specific optical filter 982, the polarization modifyingelement 986, the incoupling optical element 942, the polarizationmodifying element 958, and/or the polarization specific optical filter984 may be implemented according to the design of FIG. 15A. Thepolarization specific optical filter 984 may be atransmissive-reflective polarizer (e.g., a polarizer beam splitter)configured to transmit light of a first polarization and to redirect orreflect light of a second polarization different from the first.

A partially reflective element (e.g., semi-transparent mirror) may beincluded to turn the incoupled light 904 to the imaging device 920. Thepartially reflective element may be disposed between the incouplingoptical element 942 and the polarization modifying element 986 such thata portion of the incoupled light 914 is reflected toward the imagingdevice 920 while reducing leakage of the incoupled light 914 out of thewaveguide 940. The portion of light that does not leak out may be anyfraction between 0 and 1. For example, the portion may be 0.90, where90% of the light rays propagating through the waveguide 940 along thecoupling optical element 944 are maintained within the waveguide 940 ateach reflection of the light rays. Other portions are possible (e.g.,0.10, 0.20, 0.30, 0.40, 0.50, 0.60, 0.70, 0.80, or any value in a rangebetween these values).

FIG. 15B illustrates propagation of light reflected or scatter off theretina. Some of the light 910 reflected from the retina that is incidenton the coupling optical element 944 having the second polarization(s-polarization) is turned by the coupling optical element 944 at anglegreater than the critical angle of the waveguide 940 and thus may beguided therein. Some of the light may not be coupled into the waveguide940 and will transmit therethrough as non-incoupled light 912. Theincoupled light 904 may propagate through the waveguide 940 toward thecamera.

Other implementations may benefit from use of polarization selectiveelements proximal the light source and camera. For example, varioussystems can be configured to provide illumination having a firstpolarization and capture images with the camera using light having adifferent polarization. For example, such a configuration may be used toreduce unwanted reflections, such as from the cornea when imaging theretina. Reflection from the cornea will be specular. Accordingly, iflight of a first polarization is incident on the cornea, the lightreflected from the cornea will retain that first polarization. Incontrast, the retina is diffuse. If light of a first polarization isincident on the retina, the light reflected from the retina does notretain solely the first polarization. The diffuse reflection more likelyresults in unpolarized light. Accordingly, a second polarization,different from the first polarization will be present in the reflectedlight. Likewise by illuminating with a first polarization and imagingwith a second different polarization, the retina can be image withreduced glare from the cornea.

Accordingly, in various implementations, the polarization specificoptical filters 982, 984 may be used together to reduce unwantedreflected light from the eye 210 (e.g., from the cornea). For example,unwanted light, glare, or glint may be reflected off the cornea that maysaturate an image captured by the imaging device 920. Light reflectedfrom the cornea may be specular and maintain its polarization. Bycontrast, light reflected off the retina may be more diffusely reflectedand may be less homogenously polarized. Likewise, a combination ofpolarizers may be used to remove some or most of the unwanted reflectedlight. Initially polarized light can be used for illuminating the eye210. In some designs, a polarized illumination source (e.g., the lightsource 960) may be used. Additionally or alternatively, a firstpolarizer (e.g., the polarization specific optical filter 982) may bepositioned at the beginning of the optical path of the illuminationsource to provide initial polarization of the light. A second polarizer(e.g., the polarization specific optical filter 984) may be positionedat the optical path before the light enters the imaging device 920. Thesecond polarizer may be rotated at 90° from the first polarizer (e.g.the polarizers 982, 984 may be “crossed”). As a result, the eye will beilluminated with the first polarization with some light of the firstpolarization reflected from the cornea. This light will not pass throughthe polarizer 984 proximal the camera. However, light reflected from theretina will include the second polarization. Likewise light diffuselyreflected from the retina will pass through the polarize 984 proximalthe camera and will enable an image of the retina to be captured by thecamera. Thus, in such as configuration unwanted light received from theeye (e.g., from cornea) may be entering the imaging device 920 may bereduced or eliminated. Other configurations are possible. For example, apolarization selective incoupling optical element 942 for coupling lightfrom the light source 960 into the waveguide 940 and a polarizationselective outcoupling optical element for coupling light out of thewaveguide to the camera 920 may be employed having differentpolarization selectivity properties. For example, the polarizationselective incoupling optical element may selectively turn light from theillumination source having a first polarization into the waveguide whilethe outcoupling optical element may selectively turn light of a seconddifferent polarization out of the waveguide to the camera. The effectmay again be to reduce or remove unwanted light received from the eye(e.g., from cornea) before entering the imaging device 920.

Various imaging systems 900 are discussed herein that are capable ofusing the eyepiece 950 to collect light to image the retina. The imagingsystems 900, however, can be configured to image other portions of theeye such as anterior portions of the eye. FIG. 16 illustrates how animaging system 900 can be used for imaging an anterior portion (e.g.,cornea) of an eye 210. The imaging system 900 may include one or moreelements of the example imaging systems 900 described above. Inaddition, an example imaging system 900 may include one or more poweredoptical elements or lenses such as powered refractive optical elements980, 990 having optical power. For example, a positive power lens orpositive lens 980 may be disposed on a proximal side (e.g., closer tothe eye 210) of the eyepiece 950 between the eye 210 and the eyepiece. Anegative power lens or negative lens 990 may be disposed on a distalside of the eyepiece 950, between the eyepiece and the environmentforward the user. One or both of the lenses 980, 990 may be variablefocus elements (e.g., varifocal lenses) and/or may include a liquidcrystal element. In some designs, one or both of the lenses 980, 990includes a Fresnel lens. The lenses 980, 990 may incorporate liquidcrystals to produce Fresnel lens functionality. Such functionality mayallow for variable focus of one or both of the lenses 980, 990. In somedesigns, one or more of the lenses 980, 990 may be integrated withand/or manufactured (e.g., formed) on or into the eyepiece 950.

In various embodiments, the coupling optical element 944 is configuredto turn collimated light reflected from the eye 210 into the light guideto be guided therein. Accordingly, the positive lens 980 may beconfigured to collimate light reflected from the eye 210, such as ananterior portion of the eye (e.g., the cornea). The positive lens 980therefore may have a focal length that is equal or substantially equalto the distance of the lens to the portion of the eye 210 to be imaged,e.g., the cornea.

The negative lens 990 may have a similar or the same optical power asthe positive lens 980 to offset or counter the optical power of thepositive lens. In this way, light from the environment (e.g., distal ofthe waveguide 940) may pass through the negative lens 990, the eyepiece950, and the positive lens 980 with substantially no net change inoptical power introduced by these two lenses. Thus, the negative lens990 may be configured to offset or cancel out the optical power of thepositive lens 980 such that a user will not experience the power of thepositive lens when viewing the environment in front of the eyepiece 950.The negative lens 990 will also counter the effect of the positive lens980 to invert images of object in the environment in front of thewearer.

FIG. 16 illustrates light 928 that is incident on the cornea scatteringtherefrom. The imaging system 900 may be configured to capture thislight 988 reflected from the cornea. For example, the positive lens 980may collect a portion of the light 988 scattered from the cornea andcollimate this light 988. This light 988, collimated by the positivelens 980, is incident on the coupling optical element 944, which isconfigured to turn collimated light into the waveguide 940 at an anglelarger than the critical angle of the waveguide such that the light isguided therein by TIR. The coupling optical element 944, the outcouplingoptical element 952, and/or the waveguide 940 may be as described above.Resultant outcoupled light 906 may be directed by the outcouplingoptical element 952 out of the waveguide 940 to the camera (not shown).

FIG. 16 shows light 928, such as collimated light, which may be from theeyepiece 950 such as describe above. An illumination source 960 maycouple light into the waveguide 940 and the coupling element 944 maycouple this light from the illumination source 960 out of the waveguide.The coupling element 944 may be configured to couple light out of thewaveguide 940 as collimated light. This light illuminates the anteriorportion of the eye (e.g., the cornea) and scatters therefrom. Asdiscussed above, this scattered light 988 can be collected by thepositive lens 980 and the imaging system 900 to form an image of theanterior portion of the eye 210. Also as discussed above, thisillumination 928 directed onto the eye 210 may be invisible (e.g.,infrared) light.

FIG. 16 also shows an alternative arrangement for illuminating the eye210. In some designs, one or more light sources 934 such as LEDs oremitters may be disposed with respect to the eye 210 to direct lightthereon without being guided by TIR through the waveguide 940 anddirected onto the eye 210. In some implementations, the eyepiece 950 orwaveguide 940 is not in an optical path between the one or more lightsource 934 and the eye 210. In some designs, a plurality of such lightsources 934 may be arranged in a pattern (e.g., circular or ring-likepattern) near and/or around the eye. In some designs, the pattern oflight sources 934 may define an illumination axis parallel (e.g.,coaxial) with the optical axis of the one or more lenses 980, 990. Theone or more light sources 934 may be similar to the one or more lightsources 960 described above and may, for example, be pulsed. Similarly,the one or more light sources 934 may comprise infrared light sourcessuch as infrared LEDs or another type of invisible light. Alternatively,the one or more light sources may comprise visible light sources thatemit visible light. Or the one or more light sources may emit bothvisible and invisible (e.g., infrared) light.

FIG. 17 illustrates another example imaging system 900 configured toimage a portion of the eye 210 such as an anterior portion of the eye(e.g., cornea). The imaging system 900 shown in FIG. 17 employs areflective optical element 996 configured to collimate the light fromthe eye, in contrast to the transmissive optical element (lens) 980shown in FIG. 16 . A reflective optical element will have lessaberration than a transmissive optical element as chromatic aberrationis not generally applicable to reflective optical elements such as thereflector 996 shown in FIG. 17 . Accordingly, by using a reflectivesurface in collecting light from the eye 210, less (e.g., chromatic)aberration is introduced in the image captured of the eye.

FIG. 17 illustrates, for example, an imaging system 900 that includes acurved transmissive optical element 996 having a wavelength dependentreflective coating 998. The curved transmissive optical element 996 maybe disposed distal the waveguide 940 (on the environment side of theeyepiece 950). Accordingly, the curved transmissive optical element 996may be disposed between the environment forward the wearer and thewaveguide 940 and/or the coupling optical element 944. Similarly, thewaveguide 940 and/or the coupling optical element 944 may be disposedbetween the curved transmissive optical element 996 and the eye 210.

The wavelength dependent reflective coating 998 may be configured toreflect light of a certain wavelength or range of wavelengths. In someimplementations, for example, the wavelength dependent reflectivecoating 998 may be configured to reflect invisible light (e.g., infraredlight) within a certain range of wavelength, while the wavelengthdependent reflective coating 998 may be configured to transmit visiblelight. The wavelength dependent reflective coating 998 may be disposedon a surface of the curved transmissive optical element 996, in somecases.

As discussed above, in various designs, the coupling optical element 944is configured to turn collimated light reflected from the eye 210 intothe waveguide 940 to be guided therein. Accordingly, the reflectiveoptical element 996 may be configured to collimate light reflected fromthe eye 210, such as an anterior portion of the eye (e.g., the cornea).The curved reflective optical element 996 may therefore have a positiveoptical power for light that is incident on the proximal side thereofthat is reflected from wavelength dependent reflective coating 998. Inparticular, in various designs, the reflective optical element 994 mayhave a focal length that is equal or substantially equal to the distancefrom the reflective optical element 996 to the portion of the eye 210 tobe imaged, e.g., the cornea, iris, etc. Example values of focal lengthsmay be, for example, 2 cm to 8 cm. In some implementations, the focallength is between 4 cm and 6 cm. In some designs, the focal length isabout 5 cm. The focal length may be in any range formed by any of thesevalues or may be outside such ranges in different designs.

In various implementations, the reflective optical element 996 isdisposed on the distal side of the eyepiece 950 forward the eyepiece.Accordingly, the reflective optical element 996 is disposed between theeyepiece 950 and the environment forward the user. Similarly, theeyepiece 950 is disposed between the reflective optical element 996 andthe eye 210.

The curved transmissive optical element 996 may have a curved reflectivesurface having a curvature of any shape. In some implementations, thesurface is rotationally symmetric. In some implementations, the surfacemay be spherical or aspheric (e.g., parabolic). Non-rotationallysymmetric shapes are also possible. In various designs, however, thereflective surface has positive optical power. The reflective opticalelement 996 may comprise, for example, a concave mirror at least forsome wavelengths and/or polarizations.

The curved transmissive optical element 996 may be configured to havenegligible power in transmission. Likewise, the curved transmissiveoptical element 996 may be configured to transmit light withoutintroducing convergence or divergence. In one example, the curvedtransmissive optical element 996 may have a curvature of an inner radiussubstantially the same as a curvature of an outer radius. A thin opticalelement 996 may reduce optical aberration, for example, for lighttransmitted therethrough, may be lighter and/or may be more compact.

In various designs, the reflective optical element 996 comprisesmaterial transmissive to visible light such that the user can see theenvironment in front of wearer. In some cases, to enhance transmission,the curved transmissive optical element 996 may be coated on an outersurface (e.g., the distal surface) with an anti-reflective coating. Theanti-reflective coating may be configured to reduce reflection of, forexample, of visible light such as red, green, and/or blue light. Thereflective optical element 996, however, may be configured to reflect aportion of the light scattered from the eye 210 to form an image of theeye. Accordingly, the reflective optical element 996 may operate ondifferent light differently. For example, the reflective optical element996 may operate on different wavelengths differently. The reflectiveoptical element 996 may be configured to reflect infrared light andtransmit visible light.

As discussed above, one or more light sources 934 may be configured toilluminate the eye 210 with infrared light. Resultant light 988reflected from the eye 210 (e.g., cornea) may be diverge, asschematically illustrated in FIG. 17 . The curved transmissive opticalelement 996 may be disposed to receive this light 988 reflected from theeye (e.g., cornea, iris). The wavelength dependent reflective coating998 may be configured to reflect the light 988 reflected from the eyebecause the wavelength illumination used to illuminate the eye is thesame wavelength that is reflected by the reflective coating on thecurved transmissive optical element 996 (e.g., 850 nm). For example theeye may be illuminated with infrared light (e.g., 850 nm) and the curvedtransmissive optical element 996 may be configured to reflect infraredlight (e.g., 850 nm) and to pass visible light. The shape of the curvedtransmissive optical element 996 may also be configured to collimate thelight 988 reflected from the eye and to reflect the light to thecoupling optical element 944, which turns the collimated light into thewaveguide 940 to be guided therein by TIR.

In FIG. 17 , as in some other designs, one or more light sources 934such as LEDs or emitters may be disposed with respect to the eye 210 todirect light thereon without being guided by TIR through the waveguide940 and directed onto the eye 210. In some implementations, the eyepiece950 or waveguide 940 is not in an optical path between the one or morelight source 934 and the eye 210. In some designs, a plurality of suchlight sources 934 may be arranged in a pattern (e.g., circular orring-like pattern) near and/or around the eye. In some designs, thepattern of light sources 934 may define an illumination axis parallel(e.g., coaxial) with the optical axis of the one or more lenses 980,990. The one or more light sources 934 may be similar to the one or morelight sources 960 described above and may, for example, be pulsed.Similarly, the one or more light sources 934 may comprise infrared lightsources such as infrared LEDs or another type of invisible light. Othertypes of light sources, however, can be used.

FIG. 18 illustrates another example imaging system 900 configured toimage a portion of the eye 210 such as an anterior portion of the eye(e.g., cornea). In the implementation shown in FIG. 18 , polarizationselectivity is employed to assist in controlling the path of the lightreflected from the eye. In particular, in various designs, the couplingoptical element 944 is polarization selective. Light, for example,having a first polarization is transmitted through the coupling opticalelement 944 while light of a second different polarization is turned bythe coupling optical element 944 into the waveguide 940 to be coupledtherein by TIR. Accordingly, in various implementations the eye 210 isilluminated with polarized light or a polarizer (not shown) is disposedbetween the eye and the waveguide 940 such that the light from the eyeincident on the waveguide is polarized. For example, the emitters 934may emit polarized light or a polarizer may be disposed in front of theemitters 934 such that the eye 210 is illuminated with polarized light.Accordingly, in various designs, the polarization of the polarized lightincident and/or reflected from the eye 210 that is received by theoptical coupling element 944 may the first polarization such that saidlight is directed to the reflector 996.

Likewise, in various implementations, the coupling optical element 944(and/or an outcoupling optical element 952) is configured to transmitlight of a first polarization state such as a first linear, circular, orelliptical polarization state (e.g., p-polarization, left handedcircular or elliptical polarization, etc.) and turn light of a secondpolarization state such as a second linear, circular, or elliptical(e.g., s-polarization, right handed circular or elliptical polarization,etc.) into and/or out of the waveguide, respectively. In someimplementations, the eye illuminators 934 may emit only or primarily thefirst polarization (e.g., p polarization) or further include apolarization modifying element (e.g., polarizer) that is configured totransmit only light of the first polarization state (e.g.,p-polarization). Additionally, the coupling optical element 944 and/oroutcoupling optical element 952 may be configured to turn light of asecond polarization (e.g., s-polarization) into and/or out of thewaveguide, respectively.

Similar to the imaging system 900 shown in FIG. 17 , an imaging system900 the curved reflector 998 shown in FIG. 17 comprises a curvedtransmissive optical element 996 having a wavelength dependentreflective coating 998. The wavelength dependent reflective coating 998may be configured to reflect light of a certain wavelength or range ofwavelengths. In some implementations, for example, the wavelengthdependent reflective coating 998 may be configured to reflect invisiblelight (e.g., infrared light) within a certain range of wavelength, whilethe wavelength dependent reflective coating 998 may be configured totransmit visible light. The wavelength dependent reflective coating 998may be disposed on a surface of the curved transmissive optical element996, in some cases.

In various implementations, the curved transmissive optical element 996is disposed on the distal side of the eyepiece 950 forward the eyepiece.Accordingly, the reflective optical element 996 is disposed between theeyepiece 950 and the environment forward the user. Similarly, theeyepiece 950 is disposed between the reflective optical element 996 andthe eye 210.

Accordingly, light having the first polarization (e.g., p-polarization)from the eye 210 is incident on the coupling optical element 944 andpasses therethrough to the curved transmissive optical element 996. Theimaging system 900 further included a polarization modifying opticalelement 978, such as a retarder (e.g., a quarter-wave retarder). Thisretarder 978 is transmissive and imparts a quarter wave of retardance onthe light transmitted therethrough. This light is incident on andreflected from the curved transmissive optical element 996. Thewavelength dependent reflective coating 998 may be configured to reflectthe wavelength of light reflected from the eye. Consequently, this lightis reflected from the curved surface of the curved transmissive opticalelement 996 and is collimated. This collimated light passes againthrough the retarder 978, thereby imparting another quarter wave ofretardance on the light transmitted therethrough. The retardanceintroduced on these two passes through the retarder (e.g., a full waveof retardance) causes the polarization to rotate. Accordingly, the firstpolarization (e.g., p-polarization) transmitted through the polarizationselective coupling optical element 944 on the first pass, is transformedinto the second polarization (s-polarization) and is turned into thewaveguide 940 to be guided to the camera 920 by TIR. As discussed above,in various designs, the coupling optical element 944 is configured toturn collimated light reflected from the eye 210 into the waveguide 940to be guided therein. Accordingly, the reflective optical element 996may be configured to collimate light reflected from the eye 210, such asan anterior portion of the eye (e.g., the cornea). The curved reflectiveoptical element 996 may therefore have a positive optical power. Inparticular, in various designs, the reflective optical element 994 mayhave a focal length that is equal or substantially equal to the distancefrom the reflective optical element 996 to the portion of the eye 210 tobe imaged, e.g., the cornea, iris, etc. Example values of focal lengthsmay be for example, 2 cm to 8 cm. In some implementations, the focallength is between 4 cm and 6 cm. In some designs, the focal length isabout 5 cm.

In various designs, the reflective optical element 996 may comprise acurved surface that is configured to reflect light. The curved surfacemay be spherical or rotationally symmetric in certain cases. Thereflective optical element 996 may comprise, for example, a concavemirror at least for some wavelengths and/or polarizations.

In various designs, the reflective optical element 996 comprisesmaterial transmissive to visible light such that the user can see theenvironment in front of wearer. The wavelength dependent reflectivecoating 998 disposed on a surface of the curved transmissive opticalelement 996 may therefore be transmissive to visible light or at leastcertain wavelength of visible light. The curved transmissive opticalelement 996 may also be coated on an outer surface (e.g., the distalsurface) with an anti-reflective coating. The anti-reflective coatingmay be configured to reduce reflection of red, green, and/or blue light.The reflective optical element 994, however, may be configured toreflect a portion of the light scattered from the eye 210 to form animage of the eye. Accordingly, the reflective optical element 996 mayoperate on different light differently. For example, the reflectiveoptical element 996 may operate on different polarization states (and/orwavelengths) of light differently. The reflective optical element 996may be configured to transmit visible light and reflect infrared light.

As shown in FIG. 17 , the one or more light sources 934 such as LEDs oremitters in FIG. 18 may be disposed with respect to the eye 210 todirect light thereon without being guided by TIR through the waveguide940 and directed onto the eye 210. Accordingly, n some implementations,the eyepiece 950 or waveguide 940 is not in an optical path between theone or more light sources 934 and the eye 210. In some designs, aplurality of such light sources 934 may be arranged in a pattern (e.g.,circular or ring-like pattern) near and/or around the eye. The one ormore light sources 934 may be similar to the one or more light sources960 described above and may, for example, be pulsed. Similarly, the oneor more light sources 934 may comprise infrared light sources such asinfrared LEDs or another type of invisible light. In particular, invarious implementations the light sources 934 may emit light that isreflected by the wavelength dependent reflective coating 998 and/or thecurved transmissive optical element 996. Other types of light sources,however, can be used.

Although the polarization selective coupling optical element 944 isconfigured to be polarization selective depending on the type of linearpolarization incident thereon, other polarization selective couplingoptical elements may be polarization selective to other types ofpolarization states such as different types of circular or ellipticalpolarization. The polarization selective coupling optical element 944may, for example, be configured such that the first polarization, suchas a first circular or elliptical polarization (e.g., left handedpolarization or LHP-polarization), is transmitted through thepolarization selective coupling optical element 944 and the secondpolarization, such as second circular or elliptical polarization (e.g.,right handed polarization or RHP), is turned into the light guide, orvice versa. Such a polarization selective coupling optical element 944may comprise liquid crystal such as cholesteric liquid crystal. Examplesof some liquid crystal optical elements are discussed below in thesection titled “Cholesteric Liquid Crystal Mirror,” in U.S. PublicationNo. 2018/0164627, titled “DIFFRACTIVE DEVICES BASED ON CHOLESTERICLIQUID CRYSTAL,” filed on Dec. 7, 2017; in U.S. Publication No.2018/0239147, titled “DISPLAY SYSTEM WITH VARIABLE POWER REFLECTOR,”filed on Feb. 22, 2018; in U.S. Publication No. 2018/0239177, titled“VARIABLE-FOCUS VIRTUAL IMAGE DEVICES BASED ON POLARIZATION CONVERSION,”filed on Feb. 22, 2018; each of which is hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety and for all purposes.

A polarization modification element or retarder such as a circularpolarizer may be disposed between the eye and the polarization selectivecoupling optical element 944 to convert the light reflected from the eyeto the first polarization (e.g., LHP). The LHP light will pass throughthe polarization selective coupling optical element 944, reflect fromthe reflector 998, change polarization into RHP and be turned by thepolarization selective coupling optical element 944 into the waveguideto the camera.

In some implementations, the reflector 996 may be polarization selectivein its reflectivity such that only light of a certain polarization stateis reflected and/or that light of a different polarization state istransmitted. Such an optical element may comprise liquid crystal such ascholesteric liquid crystal. Examples of such optical elements arediscussed below in the section titled “Cholesteric Liquid CrystalMirror,” in U.S. Publication No. 2018/0164627, titled “DIFFRACTIVEDEVICES BASED ON CHOLESTERIC LIQUID CRYSTAL,” filed on Dec. 7, 2017; inU.S. Publication No. 2018/0239147, titled “DISPLAY SYSTEM WITH VARIABLEPOWER REFLECTOR,” filed on Feb. 22, 2018; in U.S. Publication No.2018/0239177, titled “VARIABLE-FOCUS VIRTUAL IMAGE DEVICES BASED ONPOLARIZATION CONVERSION,” filed on Feb. 22, 2018; each of which ishereby incorporated by reference in its entirety and for all purposes.Such optical elements may reflect light of a first polarization statesuch as a first circular or elliptical polarization state (left handedcircular or elliptical polarization) and transmit light of a secondpolarization state such as a second circular or elliptical polarizationstate (e.g. right handed circular or elliptical polarization) or viceversa. In some embodiments, the liquid crystal is disposed on a curvedsurface of the reflector 996 such that in reflection, the reflector hasoptical power such as positive optical power. In various otherimplementations, the liquid crystal optical element may be flat orplanar. For example, the liquid crystal may be disposed on a flat orplanar substrate or layer. Despite being flat, optical power may beincluded in the liquid crystal optical element. Such an element may bereferred to as a cholesteric liquid crystal reflective lens.Accordingly, light from the eye may be collimated and reflected to thecoupling optical element 998. The reflector, for example, may reflectlight of a first polarization state (e.g., left handed circular orelliptical) and transmit light of a second polarization (e.g., righthanded circular or elliptical polarization). Accordingly, the eye 210 isilluminated with left handed circular polarized light or the lightreflected from the eye is transmitted through a polarizer (e.g., acircular or elliptical polarizer) that transmits light having the firstpolarization (e.g., left handed circular or elliptical polarized light).The coupling optical element 944 may also be polarization selective andmay transmit LHP light and turn RHP light into the waveguide. The LHPlight from the eye passes through the coupling optical element 944. Thistransmitted LHP light also is incident on the wavelength-selectiveliquid crystal reflector 996 and reflected therefrom. In certaindesigns, the wavelength-selective liquid crystal reflector 996transforms the first polarization state (e.g. LHP) into the secondpolarization state (e.g. RHP) upon reflection. This light of the secondpolarization state (e.g., RHP light) is directed to the coupling opticalelement 944, which turns light of the second polarization state (RHP)into the waveguide 940 to the camera 920.

In some designs, the coupling optical element 944 does not comprise aliquid crystal grating but instead comprises, for example a surfacerelief diffraction grating or holographic grating. As discussed above,these coupling optical element 944 that do not comprise cholestericliquid crystal may also comprise a volume diffractive or holographicoptical elements or grating.

Accordingly, light scattered from the eye, is reflected by thereflective optical element 996 back to the waveguide 940 for couplinginto the waveguide by the coupling element 944. In contrast, however, aportion of the unpolarized light from the environment in front of thewearer corresponding to the second polarization state (e.g., RHP) wouldbe transmitted through the reflective optical element 996. Thus, thewearer could see objects through the reflective optical element 996.

In various designs, however, the reflective optical element 996 wouldhave negligible power in transmission. For example, the reflectiveoptical element 996 may have curved surfaces on both sides of theoptical element having the same curvature such that the aggregate powerof the optical element for light transmitted therethrough would benegligible.

As discussed above, in various implementations, the reflective opticalelement 996 comprises a cholesteric liquid crystal reflective lens, acholesteric liquid crystal reflective element such as discussed below inthe section titled “Cholesteric Liquid Crystal Mirror,” in U.S.Publication No. 2018/0164627, titled “DIFFRACTIVE DEVICES BASED ONCHOLESTERIC LIQUID CRYSTAL,” filed on Dec. 7, 2017; in U.S. PublicationNo. 2018/0239147, titled “DISPLAY SYSTEM WITH VARIABLE POWER REFLECTOR,”filed on Feb. 22, 2018; in U.S. Publication No. 2018/0239177, titled“VARIABLE-FOCUS VIRTUAL IMAGE DEVICES BASED ON POLARIZATION CONVERSION,”filed on Feb. 22, 2018; each of which is hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety and for all purposes. Such optical element mayoperate on a particular wavelength or wavelength range. Accordingly,light such as infrared light reflected from the eye may be acted on bythe cholesteric liquid crystal reflective element. However, light not inthat wavelength range such as visible light from the environment may bepassed through the cholesteric liquid crystal reflective element withoutbeing operated on by the cholesteric liquid crystal reflective element.Accordingly, the cholesteric liquid crystal reflective element may havenegligible power for this visible light from the environment passingtherethrough

As discussed above, in certain implementations, the illumination source960 couples light into the waveguide 940 that is turned out of thewaveguide to illuminate the eye 210. In such embodiments, the couplingoptical element 944 may be polarization selective. For example, thecoupling optical element 944 may transmit a first polarization(p-polarization) and transmit a second polarization (s-polarization).

Accordingly, if light from the illumination source 906 propagatesthrough the waveguide 940 and is turned by the coupling optical element944, this illumination will be s-polarization. A polarization modifyingoptical element (e.g., a quarter wave retarder) may be disposed betweenthe waveguide 940 and the eye 210 so as to cause rotation of thepolarized light reflected from the eye. Light from the light source 960that is reflected from the eye 210 will pass twice through the quarterwave retarder and as a result the s-polarized light ejected from thewaveguide by the coupling element 944 to illuminate the eye will betransformed into p-polarized light.

This p-polarized light will be transmitted through the coupling opticalelement 944 and the waveguide and be incident on the reflective opticalelement 996.

The imaging system 900 may further comprise a second polarizationmodifying element 978 which may comprise, for example, a retarder orwaveplate as discussed above. This retarder may comprise for example aquarter wave retarder. The second polarization modifying element 978 maybe disposed distal of the waveguide 940, between the waveguide and thereflector 996. The second polarization modifying element 978 may also bedisposed between the coupling element light 944 and the reflector 996.Light (p-polarized) from the eye 210 that is transmitted through thecoupling element light 944 passes through second polarization modifyingelement 978 is transformed into circular polarization. If the reflector996 reflects circular polarized light, this light will be reflected backto the waveguide 940 after passing again through the polarizationmodifying element 978. Two passes through this polarization modifyingelement (e.g., quarter wave retarder) 978 will cause the light to betransformed into s-polarized light, which will be turned by the couplingelement 944 into the waveguide to be guide therein to the camera (notshown).

As illustrated in FIG. 18 , the light 988 reflected from the eye 210 isdiverging. This light is incident on the reflector 996, which is curvedor otherwise has positive optical power, and may be collimated thereby.The coupling optical element 944, which is configured to turn collimatedinto the waveguide 940, will therefore direct this collimated light fromthe curved reflective optical element 996 toward the imaging device 920(not shown). Accordingly, the light reflected from the eye 210 that iscollimated by the curved reflective optical element 996 is coupled intothe waveguide 940 and guided therein toward the outcoupling opticalelement 952. The outcoupling optical element 952 may be configured todirect the light out of the eyepiece 950 to the camera (not shown).

A wide variety of variations are possible in the configurations of theimaging system. Different types of reflectors 996 and coupling elements944 may be employed. The reflectors 996 and coupling elements 944 may,for example, be configured to operate on linear polarized light orcircular or elliptical polarized light. As discussed, the reflectors 996have optical power. The reflectors 996 and coupling elements 944 maycomprise cholesteric liquid crystal grating reflectors and/or lenseswith our without optical power. Polarization modifying elements 978 suchas retarders may be included between the coupling elements 944 and thereflector and/or between the coupling elements 944 and the eye. In someembodiments, a polarizer such as a circular polarizer or a linearpolarizer may be disposed between the eye and the coupling elements 944.If for example unpolarized light is reflected from the eye, a polarizer(e.g., circular polarizer or linear polarizer) may be disposed betweenthe eye and the coupling elements 944. In some such cases the couplingelements 944 are polarization selective.

In configurations such as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 , where lightreflected from the eye passes through the waveguide 940 to the curvedreflective optical element 996 to be collimated and redirected back tothe waveguide, background noise is introduced. This background noiseresults from light passing initially from the eye through the couplingoptical element 944. As discussed above, the coupling optical element944 may be configured to turn collimated light into the waveguide 940 tobe guided therein to the camera 920 where an image is formed. Thecoupling optical element 944 will, however, turn some non-collimatedlight incident thereon. Accordingly, on the initial pass through thecoupling optical element 944 and the waveguide 940 to the curvedreflective optical element 996, some of the non-collimated (diverging)light reflected from the eye will be coupled by the coupling opticalelement 944 into the waveguide and contribute background noise to imageof the eye formed at by the camera 920. This noise will be superimposedon the image formed by the collimated light retro-reflected by thecurved reflective optical element 996 that is coupled by the couplingoptical element 944 into the waveguide to be guided therein to thecamera 920.

In certain designs, this noise can be subtracted out from the image. Theprocess for subtracting out the noise from the signal may involve (a)measuring the amount of light coupled by the coupling optical element944 on the initial pass through the coupling optical element 944 to thecurved reflective optical element 996 that is turned and reaches thecamera 920 (referred to as N) and (b) measuring the total signal at thecamera 920 when light passes through coupling optical element 944 andthe waveguide 940 to the curved reflective optical element 996, iscollimated, and reflected back to the coupling optical element andturned to the camera. This total signal will also include some noise, N,as the uncollimated light reflected from the eye will have passedthrough the coupling optical element 944 to get to the curved reflectiveoptical element 996 and thus some of uncollimated light will be turnedby the coupling optical element 944 to the camera 920. If the noise, N,can be measured separately from the total signal, T, that includes thenoise superimposed over the image of the eye, the noise, N, can besubtracted out from the total signal, T, as represented by the formulabelow:I=T−N

where I represents the image with the noise component, N, removed.

The two measurements (a) and (b) above can be obtained in various ways.For example, as shown in FIG. 19 , a shutter 936 can be disposed betweenthe curved reflective optical element 996 and the waveguide 940 andcoupling optical element 944. This shutter 936 may be configured toblock light when the shutter is in a first state and to transmit lightwhen the shutter is in a second state. This shutter 936 may comprise,for example, a liquid crystal shutter.

Accordingly, the noise component N can be measured when the shutter 936is in the first state where light reflected from the eye 210 is incidenton the coupling optical element 944, passes therethrough toward thecurved reflective optical element 996, however, is prevented fromreaching the curved reflective optical element by the closed shutter. Asdiscussed above, some of the light reflected from the eye 210, althoughmainly uncollimated, does couple into the coupling optical element 944and is turned into the waveguide and guided therein to the camera 920.As referenced above, this light does not contribute to formation of animage, but will be background noise. The camera 920 may record thisnoise, N, when the shutter 936 is closed.

The total signal, T, including both the noise, N, and the image, can bemeasured when the shutter 936 is in the second state where the shutteris open. Light reflected from the eye 210 is again incident on thecoupling optical element 944. Some of this light reflected from the eye210, although mainly uncollimated, couples into the coupling opticalelement 944 and is turned into the waveguide and guided therein to thecamera 920. Most of this light reflected from the eye 210, however,passes through the coupling optical element 944, through the openshutter 936 and to the curved reflective optical element 996. The curvedreflective optical element 996 collimates and reflects at least aportion of this light back to the coupling optical element 944, whichturns this collimated light into the waveguide 920 to be guided to thecamera 920 to form an image of the eye 210. The camera 920 can capturethis image of the eye 210.

Processing electronics (such as processing electronics 140) incommunication with the camera 920 can receive the noise component, N,measured when the shutter 936 was in the first closed state as well asthe total signal, T, measured when the shutter was in the second openstate and can subtract the two (T-N). In this manner, the noise, N,contributed by the non-collimated light reflected from the eye 210 thatis coupled into the coupling optical element 944 on the initial passtherethrough, can be subtracted from the total image signal, T. Theprocessing electronics may be in communication with the camera 920 via awired electronic signal. Additionally or alternatively, the processingelectronics may communicate with the camera 920 using one or more remotereceivers. The processing electronics may reside remotely (e.g., cloudcomputing devices, remote server, etc.).

Other ways may be employed to perform the measurement of (a) and (b) toobtain N and T and subtract N from T. For example, if the curvedreflective optical element 996 is wavelength selective such as shown inFIG. 18 , the eye can be illuminated with light of different wavelengthat different times. For example, to perform the measurement (a) andquantify the noise, N, the eye can be illuminated with a wavelength thatis not reflected by the curved reflective optical element 996. However,to perform the measurement (b) and quantify the total signal, T, the eyecan be illuminated with a wavelength that is reflected by the curvedreflective optical element 996. The noise, N, can then be subtractedfrom the total T, as discussed above (e.g., T−N).

FIGS. 20-20E illustrate an example imaging system 900 configured to usewavelength modulation to measure and subtract out the noise component,N, as discussed above. The imaging system 900 in FIGS. 20A-20E includesa curved transmissive optical element 996 that is wavelength selective(such as described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18 above). Forexample, the curved transmissive optical element 996 has a wavelengthdependent reflective coating 998 on a curved surface thereof. Theimaging system 900 may also include one or more light sources orillumination sources (not shown) configured to illuminate the eye 210.The one or more light sources may be configured to emit infrared light.The one or more light sources, however, can be configured to emitdifferent color or wavelength light at different times. Such wavelengthmodulation can enable the measurement of N separately so as to besubtracted out from the total signal, T.

In various implementations, for example, the one or more illuminationsources 960, 934 may be configured in a first state to emit one or morewavelengths that are reflected by the curved reflective optical element,λ_(Reflect), and in a second state one or more wavelengths that are notreflected λ_(Not Reflect). In the second state, no more than negligibleamounts of wavelengths that are reflected by the curved reflectiveoptical element, λ_(Reflect), are emitted. Similarly, in the firststate, no more than negligible amounts of wavelengths that are notreflected λ_(Not Reflect) are emitted.

In some examples, the reflected wavelength(s), λ_(Reflect), may bebetween about 800 nm and 950 nm. The reflected wavelength(s),λ_(Reflect), may be between about 835 nm and 915 nm. The reflectedwavelength(s), λ_(Reflect), may be between about 840 nm and 870 nm. Insome designs, the reflected wavelength, λ_(Reflect), is about 850 nm.The light emission 928 from the one or more light sources 960 mayilluminate the eye.

As shown in FIG. 20B, light 988 having the wavelength(s) that are notreflected by the curved reflective optical element 944, λ_(Not Reflect),(and no more than negligible amounts of light that is reflected by thecurved reflective optical element 944, λ_(Reflect)) is reflected offpart of the eye 210 (e.g., the cornea). Because this light compriseswavelength(s) that are not reflected by the curved reflective opticalelement 944, λ_(Not Reflect), rays of light 916 are shown propagatingthrough the curved reflective optical element 996 to the environmentforward the user.

Although the light 988 incident on the coupling optical element 944 isnot collimated, the coupling optical element nevertheless couples atleast some light 914 into the waveguide 940 to be guided to the camera920. According, the camera 920 may capture an image (Image #1)corresponding to the noise component, N, that results from uncollimatedlight that is turned by the coupling optical element 944 on the initialpass to the curved reflective optical element 996. This image (Image #1)is background noise and does is not a recognizable image of the eye.Processing electronics 140 is shown as receiving this first image (Image#1).

In FIGS. 20C-20E, the illumination sources (not shown) emit one or morewavelengths that are reflected by the curved reflective optical element,λ_(Reflect), and no more than negligible amounts of wavelengths that arenot reflected λ_(Not Reflect). This wavelength, λ_(Reflect), may be, forexample, 850 nm.

As shown in FIG. 20C, some of the light 988 reflected from the eye 210that is incident on coupling optical element 944 in the first passthrough the coupling optical element 944 is coupled by the couplingoptical element 944 into the waveguide 940 (as in FIG. 20B) and directedtoward the camera 920. Additionally, the curved transmissive opticalelement 996, which selectively reflect light of wavelength λ_(Reflect),reflects and collimates the non-incoupled light 918 reflected from theeye 210 that is incident on the curved transmissive optical element. Asillustrated in FIG. 20E, the coupling optical element 944 turns andcouples this collimated reflected light into the waveguide 940 towardthe camera 920. FIG. 20E shows both components reaching the camera 920,light 988 reflected from the eye 210 that is incident on couplingoptical element 944 in the first pass through the coupling opticalelement 944 is coupled by the coupling optical element into thewaveguide 940 and light reflected and collimate by the curvedtransmissive optical element 996 that is coupled by the coupling opticalelement into the waveguide. The camera 920 may capture an image (Image#2) corresponding to this total image component, T. Processingelectronics 140 is shown as receiving this second image (Image #2).

As discussed above, the processing electronics may subtract the noisefrom the image, T−N. In this example, Image #1 can be subtracted fromImage #2. Accordingly, the processing electronics 140 may be configuredto modify the second image based on the first image. Other approaches,however, are possible. For example, the processing electronics 140 maybe configured to create a new image that represents a version of thesecond image with reduced optical noise. Implementations for subtractingnoise from the image may be used in implementations described above. Forexample, implementations shown in FIGS. 10, 11A-11E, and/or FIGS.12A-12E can include a shutter 936 and/or a curved transmissive opticalelement 996 having a wavelength dependent reflective coating 998configured to selectively reflect non-incoupled light 912 and to directthe light to an imaging device 920.

As discussed above, the Image #1 was obtained for the case where thelight was illuminated with one or more wavelengths that are notreflected by the curved reflective optical element, λ_(Not Reflect), andno more than negligible amounts of wavelengths that are reflectedλ_(Reflect). Image #2 was obtained for the case where the light wasilluminated with one or more wavelengths that are reflected by thecurved reflective optical element, λ_(Reflect), and no more thannegligible amounts of wavelengths that are not reflectedλ_(Not Reflect). Accordingly, the one or more illumination sources 960,934 may be configured to modulate in wavelength. For example, in certaindesigns the one or more illumination sources 960, 934 may comprise afirst illumination source configured to output one or more wavelengthsnot reflected by the curved reflective optical element, λ_(Not Reflect),and no more than negligible amounts of wavelengths that are reflectedλ_(Reflect). The one or more illumination sources may further comprise asecond illumination source configured to output one or more wavelengthsthat are reflected by the curved reflective optical element,λ_(Reflect), and no more than negligible amounts of wavelengths that arenot reflected λ_(Not Reflect). The intensity of the first and secondillumination sources can be alternately increased and decreased, turnedon and off, attenuated and not attenuated, passed and blocked to providemodulation in the wavelength of light illuminating the eye. For example,during a first time interval the first illumination source can beblocked while the second illumination source is not blocked. During asubsequent second time interval, the second illumination source can beblocked while the first illumination source is not blocked. This processcan be repeated to provide modulation of the wavelength of lightilluminating the eye. In other designs, the wavelength of a light sourcemay be tuned and detuned to shifted the wavelength back and forthbetween Reflect and λ_(Not Reflect). Other arrangements are possible.

As described above, imaging systems 900 may be included in head mounteddisplays such as augmented reality displays that additionally providethe ability to image the eye by collecting light with the eyepiece 950.Such imaging systems 900 may be used for eye tracking. Multiple imagesof the retina or an anterior portion of the eye may be obtained.Movement and/or repositioning of the eye can be ascertained from theseimages to track the eye position and/or orientation. These imagingsystem may also be use as for biometric imaging and/or for identifyingthe user. For example, an image of the user's eye such as of the retinaor iris may be obtained and recorded. A subsequent image of the eye(e.g., retina, or iris) of the wearer may be obtained at a later time.The two images may be compared to determine whether the wearer in thatlater instance was the wearer in the first instance. Other uses for theimaging systems however are possible.

Although illumination systems may be described above as waveguide basedand comprising one or more waveguides, other types of light turningoptical elements may be employed instead of a waveguide. Such lightturning optical elements may include turning features to eject the lightout of the light turning optical element, for example, onto the spatiallight modulator. Accordingly, in any of the examples described herein aswell as any of the examples below, any reference to waveguide may bereplaced with light turning optical element instead of a waveguide. Sucha light turning optical element may comprise, for example, a polarizingbeam splitter such as a polarizing beam splitting prism.

As discussed above the systems described herein can allow for collectionof biometric data and/or biometric identification. For example, the eyeor portions thereof (e.g., the retina) can be imaged to provide suchbiometric data and/or biometric identification. Images of the eye suchas of the retina may be obtained at various times when the head mounteddisplay system is being worn by a user, presumably the same user. Acollection of such images can be recorded, for example, in a database.These images may be analyzed to collect biometric data. Such biometricdata may be useful for monitoring the user's health or medical status.Different medical parameters can be monitored by imaging the patient,for example, the patient eye (e.g., retina). The medical parameters canbe recorded and compared with subsequent measurements obtained when theuser is wearing the head mounted display system.

In addition, if a person begins wearing the head mounted display systemand an image of the user's eye is captured that does not match theimages stored in the database a conclusion may be drawn that the personcurrently wearing the head mounted display system is different from theprevious user. This can be useful in determining whether the intendeduser is wearing the headset or if it is being worn by a new user. Such afeature may allow for certain medical, security, and/orconvenience-in-use applications or functionality. For example, the headmounted display may be configured to identify a wearer based oncharacteristics of the wearer's eye. For example, the system can beconfigured to determine an individual based on features of a wearer'sretina (e.g. blood vessels), cornea, or other eye features. In someimplementations for example, a series of markers may be determined for aparticular wearer. Based on the series of markers, the system may beable to determine that the previous user is wearing the headset or,alternatively, that another user is wearing the headset. The markers mayinclude a shape or center of a user's cornea, a configuration of bloodvessels in the user's retina, an intensity and/or position of areflection of light from the cornea, a shape of an aspect of the eye,and/or any other biometric marker. In certain implementations aconfusion matrix can be determined. As discussed above for example inthe discussion of developing a retinal map using a virtual/fixationtarget at a variety of location (see, e.g., FIG. 13B), the system mayhave a user look in a set of predetermined directions or eye poses anddevelop a matrix of characteristics of the eye or part of the eye (e.g.,cornea, retina, etc.) associated with each direction or eye pose. Usingsuch a matrix, the system can determine an identity of the individual.Other methods are possible.

Similarly, as discussed above, a wide variety of configurations of thesystem are possible. For example, FIG. 21 shows an example eyepiece 900that can be used to simultaneously project light into a user's eye whileimaging the user's eye. The eyepiece 900 shown includes an incouplingoptical element 2104, a light distributing element 2108, and a lightconsolidating element 2116, and an outcoupling optical element 2120 onopposite sides of a coupling optical element 2112. Each of these opticalelements may be disposed within or on a waveguide 2102. The waveguide2102 may correspond, for example, to one of the waveguides 670, 680, 690described herein (see, e.g., FIG. 9A-9C). The incoupling optical element2104 may correspond to one of incoupling optical elements 700, 710, 720described herein and/or to the incoupling optical element 942 (see,e.g., FIG. 10 ) and may be configured to inject image content from aprojector into the waveguide and/or illumination from a light source960. The light distributing element 2108 may correspond to one of thelight distributing elements 730, 740, 750 described herein (see, e.g.,FIGS. 9A-9C and may be used to spread light in a given direction andredirect the light from the incoupling optical element 2104 to thecoupling optical element 2112. The coupling optical element 2112 maycorrespond to the coupling optical element 944 described herein (see,e.g., FIG. 10 ). In some designs, the coupling optical element 2112includes functionality described herein with respect to the outcouplingoptical elements 800, 810, 820 (see FIGS. 9A-9C). The lightconsolidating element 2116 may be configured to reduce the lateralspatial extent of light received from the coupling optical element 2112and redirect said light toward the outcoupling optical element 2120. Theoutcoupling optical element 2120 may correspond to the outcouplingoptical element 952 described herein (see, e.g., FIG. 10 ).

The incoupling optical element 2104 may be disposed within or on thewaveguide 2102 so as to receive light, such as from a projector (e.g.,the image projector 930) and/or an illuminator (e.g., the light source960). The light may be passed via the waveguide 2102 to the associatedlight distributing optical element 2108. Any of the incoupling opticalelement 2104, light distributed optical element 2108 or coupling opticalelement 2112 may be disposed on a major surface of (e.g., on a top orbottom surface) of the waveguide or within the waveguide. Similarly, anyone or combination of the light consolidating element 2116, and/or theoutcoupling optical element 2120 may be disposed on the major surface(e.g., a top or both major surface) of the waveguide 2102 or within thewaveguide.

The coupling optical element 2112 may receive the light (e.g., via TIR)from the light distributing element 2108 and expand the light to enterthe user's eye. Thus, the coupling optical element 2112 may be disposedin front of a user's eye and project image content therein. Additionallyor alternatively, the coupling optical element 2112 may be configured toprovide illuminating light onto and/or into the user's eye.

Light that is reflected from the eye (e.g., the illumination light fromthe illumination source) may be reflected and captured by the couplingoptical element 2112. Thus, in some embodiments, the coupling opticalelement 2112 can serve to both outcouple light received from the lightdistributing element 2108 and incouple light received from the eye intothe waveguide 2102.

In some embodiments, the coupling optical element 2112 may include oneor more diffractive optical elements (DOEs) such that the couplingoptical element 2112 has dual functionality. A first DOE (e.g., agrating, holographic region) may be configured to outcouple light aswell and a second DOE may be configured to incouple reflected light fromthe eye into the waveguide 2102. In some embodiments, both the first andsecond DOEs are superimposed (e.g., occupy the same or approximately thesame volume) within the waveguide 2102.

Alternatively, in some embodiments, the coupling optical element 2112includes at least two DOEs that are stacked on over or in front of theother. For example, with reference to FIG. 21 , the first DOE of thecoupling optical element 2112 may be disposed over, whereas the seconddiffractive element may be disposed under the first DOE. The order ofeach DOE may be reversed in other implementations.

Cholesteric Liquid Crystal Mirror

Some liquid crystals are in a phase referred to as a chiral phase or acholesteric phase. In a cholesteric phase, the liquid crystals canexhibit a twisting of the molecules along an axis perpendicular to thedirector, where the molecular axis is parallel to the director. Asdescribed herein, a cholesteric liquid crystal (CLC) layer comprises aplurality of liquid crystal molecules in a cholesteric phase that extendin a direction, e.g., a direction perpendicular to the director such asa layer depth direction, and that are successively rotated or twisted ina rotation direction, e.g., clockwise or counterclockwise. The directorsof the liquid crystal molecules in a chiral structure can becharacterized as a helix having a helical pitch (p), which correspondsto a length in the layer depth direction corresponding to a net rotationangle of the liquid crystal molecules of the chiral structures by onefull rotation in the first rotation direction. In other words, thehelical pitch refers to the distance over which the liquid crystalmolecules undergo a full 360° twist. The liquid crystals displayingchirality can also be described as having a twist angle, or a rotationangle (4)), which can refer to, for example, the relative azimuthalangular rotation between successive liquid crystal molecules in thelayer normal direction, and as having a net twist angle, or a netrotation angle, which can refer to, for example, the relative azimuthalangular rotation between an uppermost liquid crystal molecule and alowermost liquid crystal molecule across a specified length, e.g., thelength of a chiral structure or the thickness of the liquid crystallayer. As described herein, a chiral structure refers to a plurality ofliquid crystal molecules in a cholesteric phase that extend in adirection, e.g., a direction perpendicular to the director such as alayer depth direction, and are successively rotated or twisted in arotation direction, e.g., clockwise or counterclockwise. In one aspect,the directors of the liquid crystal molecules in a chiral structure canbe characterized as a helix having a helical pitch.

FIG. 22 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of a cholesteric liquidcrystal (CLC) layer 1004 comprising a plurality of uniform chiralstructures, according to embodiments. In the CLC layer 1004, the chiralstructures that are adjacent in a lateral direction, e.g., x-direction,have similarly arranged liquid crystal molecules. In the illustratedembodiment, the chiral structures 1012-1, 1012-2, . . . 1012-i aresimilarly configured such that liquid crystal molecules of the differentchiral structures that are at about the same depth, e.g., the liquidcrystal molecules closest to the light-incident surface 1004S, have thesame rotation angle, as well as successive rotation angles of successiveliquid crystal molecules at about the same depth, as well as the netrotation angle of the liquid crystal molecules of each chiral structure.

The CLC 1004 comprises a CLC layer 1008 comprising liquid crystalmolecules arranged as a plurality of chiral structures 1012-1, 1012-2, .. . 1012-i, wherein each chiral structure comprises a plurality ofliquid crystal molecules, where i is any suitable integer greater than2. In operation, when incident light having a combination of light beamshaving left-handed circular polarization and light beams havingright-handed circular polarization are incident on the surface 1004S ofthe CLC layer 1008, by Bragg-reflection, light with one of the circularpolarization handedness is reflected by the CLC layer 1004, while lightwith the opposite polarization handedness is transmitted through the CLClayer 1008 without substantial interference. As described herein andthroughout the disclosure, the handedness is defined as viewed in thedirection of propagation. According to embodiments, when the directionof polarization, or handedness of the polarization, of the light beams1016-L, 1016-R is matched such that it and has the same direction ofrotation as the liquid crystal molecules of the chiral structures1012-1, 1012-2, . . . 1012-i, the incident light is reflected. Asillustrated, incident on the surface 1004S are light beams 1016-L havingleft-handed circular polarization and light beams 1016-R having aright-handed circular polarization. In the illustrated embodiment, theliquid crystal molecules of the chiral structures 1012-1, 1012-2, . . .1012-i are rotated in a clockwise direction successively in thedirection in which incident light beams 1016-L, 1016-R travel, i.e.,positive x-direction, which is the same rotation direction as the lightteams 1016-R having right-handed circular polarization. As a result, thelight beams 1016-R having right-handed circular polarization aresubstantially reflected, whereas the light beams 1016-L havingleft-handed circular polarization are substantially transmitted throughthe CLC layer 1004.

As described supra, by matching the handedness of polarization ofincident elliptically or circularly polarized light with the directionof rotation as the liquid crystal molecules of the chiral structures ofa CLC layer, the CLC layer can be configured as a Bragg reflector.Furthermore, one or more CLC layers having different helical pitches canbe configured as a wave-length selective Bragg reflector with highbandwidth. Based on the concepts described herein with respect tovarious embodiments, the CLC layers can be configured as an off-axis oron-axis mirror configured to selectively reflect a first range ofwavelengths, for example, infrared wavelengths (e.g., the nearinfrared), while transmitting another range of wavelengths, e.g.,visible wavelengths. In some embodiments, one or more of the retinalimaging techniques described above with reference to FIGS. 13A-13B maybe performed by utilizing one or more of the off-axis mirror (OAM)configurations described below with reference to FIGS. 23-24H

FIG. 23 illustrates an example of an eye-tracking system 2300 employinga cholesteric liquid crystal reflector (CLCR), e.g., awavelength-selective CLCR 1150 configured to image an eye 302 of aviewer, according to various embodiments. Unlike the CLC layer 1004described above with respect to FIG. 22 , the chiral structures in thewavelength-selective CLCR 1150 that are adjacent in a lateral direction,e.g., x-direction, have differently arranged liquid crystal molecules.That is, the chiral structures are configured such that liquid crystalmolecules of the different chiral structures that are at about the samedepth, e.g., the liquid crystal molecules closest to the light-incidentsurface 1004S, have different rotation angle. As a result, lightincident on the CLCR 1150 is reflected at an angle (OR) relative to thelayer depth direction, as described further below in the context of theeye-tracking system 2300.

Eye tracking can be a useful feature in interactive vision or controlsystems including wearable display systems described elsewhere in thespecification, for virtual/augmented/mixed reality display applications,among other applications. To achieve effective eye tracking, it maydesirable to obtain images of the eye 302 at low perspective angles, forwhich it may in turn be desirable to dispose an eye-tracking camera 702b near a central position of viewer's eyes. However, such position ofthe camera 702 b may interfere with user's view. Alternatively, theeye-tracking camera 702 b may be disposed to a lower position or a side.However, such position of the camera may increase the difficulty ofobtaining robust and accurate eye tracking since the eye images arecaptured at a steeper angle. By configuring the CLCR 1150 to selectivelyreflect infrared (IR) light 2308 (e.g., having a wavelength of 850 nm)from the eye 302 while transmitting visible light 2304 from the world,the camera 702 b can be placed away from the user's view while capturingeye images at normal or low perspective angles. Such configuration doesnot interfere with user's view since visible light is not reflected. Thesame CLCR 1150 can also be configured as an IR illumination source 2320by reflecting IR light from an IR source, e.g., IR LED, into the eye302, as illustrated. A low perspective angle of IR illuminator canresults in less occlusions, e.g., from eye lashes, which configurationallows more robust detection of specular reflections, which can beuseful feature in modern eye-tracking systems.

Still referring to FIG. 23 , according to various embodiments, the CLCR1150 comprises one or more cholesteric liquid crystal (CLC) layers eachcomprising a plurality of chiral structures, wherein each chiralstructure comprises a plurality of liquid crystal molecules that extendin a layer depth direction (e.g., z-direction) and are successivelyrotated in a first rotation direction, as described supra. Thearrangements of the liquid crystal molecules of the chiral structuresvary periodically in a lateral direction perpendicular to the layerdepth direction such that the one or more CLC layers are configured tosubstantially Bragg-reflect a first incident light having a firstwavelength (λ₁) while substantially transmitting a second incident lighthaving a second wavelength (λ₂). As described above, each of the one ormore CLC layers are configured to substantially Bragg-reflectelliptically or circularly polarized first and second incident lighthaving a handedness of polarization that is matched to the firstrotation direction, when viewed in the layer depth direction, whilebeing configured to substantially transmit elliptically or circularlypolarized first and second incident light having a handedness ofpolarization that is opposite to the first rotation direction, whenviewed in the layer depth direction. According embodiments, thearrangements of the liquid crystal molecules varying periodically in thelateral direction are arranged to have a period in the lateral directionsuch that a ratio between the first wavelength and the period is betweenabout 0.5 and about 2.0. According to embodiments, the first wavelengthis in the near infrared range between about 600 nm and about 1.4 μm, forinstance about 850 nm and the second wavelength in is in the visiblerange having one or more colors as described elsewhere in thespecification. According to various embodiments, the liquid crystalmolecules of the chiral structures are pre-tilted relative to adirection normal to the layer depth direction. As configured, the one ormore CLC layers are configured such that the first incident light isreflected at an angle (θ_(R)) relative to the layer depth direction(z-direction) exceeding about 50°, about 60°, about 70° or about 80°degrees relative to the layer depth direction.

Thus configured, the wavelength-selective CLCR 1150 comprises one ormore cholesteric liquid crystal (CLC) layers each comprising a pluralityof liquid crystal molecules that extend in a layer depth direction andare successively rotated in a first rotation direction, whereinarrangements of the liquid crystal molecules of the chiral structuresvary periodically in a lateral direction perpendicular to the layerdepth direction such that the one or more CLC layers are configured tosubstantially Bragg-reflect a first incident light having a firstwavelength, e.g., an IR wavelength, while substantially transmitting asecond incident light having a second wavelength, e.g., a visiblewavelength.

Similar liquid crystal layers and structures may be used for thereflector 996 and coating 998 described above in connection with FIGS.17-20E. The coating 998 may for example comprise a liquid crystalcoating and may be wavelength and/or polarization selective in certainimplementations. Other types of coatings 998 and reflectors 996,however, may be employed.

Off-Axis Imaging

As discussed above, eye tracking can be a beneficial feature ininteractive vision or control systems including wearable displays, e.g.,the systems 700 described in FIGS. 24A-24H below, forvirtual/augmented/mixed reality display applications, among otherapplications. To achieve good eye tracking, it may desirable to obtainimages of the eye 302 at low perspective angles, for which it may inturn be desirable to dispose an eye-tracking camera 702 b near a centralposition of viewer's eyes. However, such position of the camera 702 bmay interfere with user's view. Alternatively, the eye-tracking camera702 b may be disposed to a lower position or a side. However, suchposition of the camera may increase the difficulty of obtaining robustand accurate eye tracking since the eye images are captured at a steeperangle. By configuring the reflector (e.g. CLCR 1150) to selectivelyreflect infrared (IR) light 2308 (e.g., having a wavelength of 850 nm)from the eye 302 while transmitting visible light 2304 from the world(e.g., as shown in FIG. 6 ), the camera 702 b can be placed away fromthe user's view while capturing eye images at normal or low perspectiveangles. Such configuration does not interfere with user's view sincevisible light is not reflected.

FIG. 24A schematically illustrates an example of an imaging system 700that comprises an imager 702 b which is used to view the eye 304, andwhich is mounted in proximity to the wearer's temple (e.g., on a frame64 of the wearable display system 200, FIG. 2 , for example, an ear stemor temple). In other embodiments, a second imager is used for thewearer's other eye 302 so that each eye is separately imaged. The imager702 b can include an infrared digital camera that is sensitive toinfrared radiation. The imager 702 b is mounted so that it is facingforward (in the direction of the wearer's vision), rather than facingbackward and directed at the eye 304 (as with the camera 500 shown inFIG. 6 ). By disposing the imager 702 b nearer the ear of the wearer,the weight of the imager 702 b is also nearer the ear, and the HMD maybe easier to wear as compared to an HMD where the imager is backwardfacing and disposed nearer to the front of the HMD (e.g., close to thedisplay 70, FIG. 2 ). Additionally, by placing the forward-facing imager702 b near the wearer's temple, the distance from the wearer's eye 304to the imager is roughly twice as large as compared to a backward-facingimager disposed near the front of the HMD (e.g., compare with the camera500 shown in FIG. 4 ). Since the depth of field of an image is roughlyproportional to this distance, the depth of field for the forward-facingimager 702 b is roughly twice as large as compared to a backward-facingimager. A larger depth of field for the imager 702 b can be advantageousfor imaging the eye region of wearers having large or protruding noses,brow ridges, etc.

The imager 702 b is positioned to view an inside surface 704 of anotherwise transparent optical element 706. The optical element 706 canbe a portion of the display 708 of an HMD (or a lens in a pair ofeyeglasses). The optical element 706 can be transmissive to at least10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95% or more of visiblelight incident on the optical element or any range between any of thesevalues. In other implementations, the optical element 706 need not betransparent (e.g., in a virtual reality display). The optical element706 can comprise a CLC off-axis mirror 708. The CLC off-axis mirror 708can be a surface reflecting a first range of wavelengths while beingsubstantially transmissive to a second range of wavelengths (that isdifferent from the first range of wavelengths). The first range ofwavelengths can, for example, be in the infrared, and the second rangeof wavelengths can be in the visible. For example, the CLC off-axismirror 708 can comprise a hot mirror, which reflects infrared lightwhile transmitting visible light. In such designs, infrared light 710 a,712 a, 714 a from the wearer propagates to and reflects from the opticalelement 706, resulting in reflected infrared light 710 b, 712 b, 714 bwhich can be imaged by the imager 702 b. In some implementations, theimager 702 b can be sensitive to or able to capture at least a subset(such as a non-empty subset and/or a subset of less than all) of thefirst range of wavelengths reflected by the CLC off-axis mirror 708. Forexample, the CLC off-axis mirror 708 may reflect infrared light in therange of 700 nm to 1.5 μm, and the imager 702 b may be sensitive to orable to capture near infrared light at wavelengths from 700 nm to 900nm. As another example, the CLC off-axis mirror 708 may reflect infraredlight in the a range of 700 nm to 1.5 μm, and the imager 702 b mayinclude a filter that filters out infrared light in the range of 900 nmto 1.5 μm such that the imager 702 b can capture near infrared light atwavelengths from 700 nm to 900 nm.

Visible light from the outside world (1144, FIG. 6 ) is transmittedthrough the optical element 706 and can be perceived by the wearer. Ineffect, the imaging system 700 shown in FIG. 24A acts as if there were avirtual imager 702 c directed back toward the wearer's eye 304. Thevirtual imager 702 c can image virtual infrared light 710 c, 712 c, 714c (shown as dotted lines) propagated from the wearer's eye 304 throughthe optical element 706. Although the hot mirror (or other DOE describedherein) can be disposed on the inside surface 704 of the optical element706, this is not a limitation. In other configurations, the hot mirroror DOE can be disposed on an outside surface of the optical element 706or within the optical element 706 (e.g., a volume HOE).

FIG. 24B schematically illustrates another example of the imaging system700. In this design, perspective distortions may be reduced oreliminated by the use of a perspective control lens assembly 716 b(e.g., a shift lens assembly, a tilt lens assembly, or a tilt-shift lensassembly) with the imager 702 b. In some implementations, theperspective control lens assembly 716 b may be part of the lens of theimager 702 b. The perspective control lens 716 b can be configured suchthat a normal to the imager 702 b is substantially parallel to a normalto the region of the surface 704 that includes the DOE (or HOE) or hotmirror. In effect, the imaging system 700 shown in FIG. 24B acts as ifthere were a virtual imager 702 c with a virtual perspective controllens assembly 716 c directed back toward the wearer's eye 304.

Additionally or alternatively, as schematically shown in FIG. 24C, theCLC off-axis mirror 708 of the optical element 706 may have, on itssurface 704, an off axis holographic mirror (OAHM), which is used toreflect light 710 a, 712 a, 714 a to facilitate viewing of the eye 304by the camera imager 702 b which captures reflected light 710 b, 712 b,714 b. Instead of reflecting light such that the angle of incidence isequal to the angle of reflection, the off-axis mirror may reflect lightat an angle other than an angle equal to the angle of incidence. Thisproperty, which is illustrated in FIG. 24C may be provided by adiffractive optical element (DOE) or a holographic optical element(HOE). The diffractive optical element or holographic optical elementmay be configured to receive light from the eye, potentially at asmaller angle with respect to the normal to the DOE or HOE and diffractat least a portion of the light at a different angle, e.g., at a largerangle with respect to the normal to the DOE or HOE, to the camera. Thediffractive optical element or holographic optical element may thereforeinclude tilt. (These reflective elements may comprise diffractiveoptical element (DOE) or holographic optical elements (HOE) withdifferent amounts of tilt programmed into the DOE or HOE. In such cases,the tilt refers to deflection of the beam as a result of diffraction.Diffractive or holographic features such as lines of a grating areconfigured, e.g., shaped and spaced with respect to each other, toredirect light incident thereon at an angle akin to the tilting of abeam. This tilt need not be produced by a tilted surface but may beproduce interferometrically and/or via diffraction.) In variousimplements, the diffractive optical element or holographic opticalelement may include optical power. As illustrated in FIG. 24D, lightrays incident on the mirror 708 are collimated but whenreflected/diffracted, the rays are converging as a result of the opticalpower incorporated in the diffractive or holographic mirrors.Accordingly, the OAHM 708 may have optical power and in someimplementations may comprise an off-axis volumetric diffractive opticalelement (OAVDOE), as schematically shown in FIG. 24D. In the exampleshown in FIG. 24D, the effective location of the virtual camera 702 c isat infinity (and is not shown in FIG. 24D) as a result of the opticalpower of the diffractive or holographic mirror. An infinity focusedcamera can have an advantage when imaging the eye of imaging the retinavia the natural lens of the eye while providing reduced imaging of otherfeatures of the eye such as eyelashes which can interfere with imageprocessing.

In some implementations, the HOE (e.g., the OAHM or OAVDOE) can bedivided into a plurality of segments. Different segments, possibly eachof the segments, can have different optical properties orcharacteristics, including, for example, reflection angles at which thesegments reflect the incoming (infrared) light (which may be referred toas tilt) and/or optical power. (As discussed above, these reflectiveelements may comprise diffractive optical element (DOE) or holographicoptical elements (HOE) with different amounts of tilt programmed intothe DOE or HOE. In such cases, the tilt refers to deflection of the beamas a result of diffraction. Diffractive or holographic features such aslines of a grating are configured, e.g., shaped and spaced with respectto each other, to redirect light incident thereon at an angle akin tothe tilting of a beam. This tilt need not be produced by a tiltedsurface but may be produce interferometrically and/or via diffraction.)Different amounts of tilt included in the different segments of thediffractive or holographic optical element can cause the light incidenton the different segments to be diffracted different amounts. Thesegments can be configured so that light is reflected from differentsegments, e.g., each segment, toward the imager 702 b. As a result ofdifferent amounts of tilt programmed into different segments, the imageacquired by the imager 702 b will also be divided into a correspondingnumber of segments as are different segments or types of segments, whichcan, for example, effectively provide a view the eye from a differentangle. FIG. 24E schematically illustrates an example of the displaysystem 700 having an OAHM with three segments 718 a 1, 718 a 2, 718 a 3,each of which acts as a respective virtual camera 702 c 1, 702 c 2, 702c 3 imaging the eye 304 at a different angular location. The threedifferent segments diffract and deflect or reflect light differentamounts providing different perspective of the eye possibly alsoproviding images of different portions of the retina.

FIG. 24F schematically illustrates another example of the display system700 having an OAHM with three segments 718 a 1, 718 a 2, 718 a 3, eachalso having optical power and different amounts of tilt (e.g., asegmented OAVDOE), with each segment thereby generating a virtual cameraat infinity imaging the eye 304 at a different angular location.Although three segments are schematically illustrated in FIGS. 24E and24F, this is for illustration and not limitation. In other designs, two,four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, or more segments, or any rangebetween any of these values, can be utilized. None, some, or all ofthese segments of the HOE can have optical power.

The three segments 718 a 1, 718 a 2, 718 a 3 are shown as spacedhorizontally across the optical element 706 in FIGS. 24E and 24F. Inother designs, the segments can be spaced vertically on the opticalelement 706. For example, FIG. 24G schematically shows a DOE 718 havingtwo vertically spaced segments 718 a 1 and 718 a 2, with the segment 718a 1 comprising a CLC off-axis mirror configured to reflect light backtoward the imager 702 b (which may be in the same general horizontalplane as the segment 718 a 1), and the segment 718 a 2 configured toreflect light upwards toward the imager 702 b. Similar to bifocallenses, the arrangement shown in FIG. 24G can be advantageous inallowing the imaging system 700 to use reflection imagery acquired bythe imager 702 b from the upper segment 718 a 1 when the wearer islooking forward through the upper portion of the HMD (schematicallyshown via the solid arrowed line) and to use reflection imagery from thelower segment 718 a 2 when the wearer is looking downward through thelower portion of the HMD (schematically shown via the dashed arrowedline).

A mix of horizontally spaced and vertically spaced segments can be usedin other designs. For example, FIG. 24H shows another example of the HOE718 with a 3×3 array of segments each comprising a CLC off-axis mirror.The imager 702 b can acquire reflection data from each of these ninesegments, which represent light rays coming from different areas of andangular directions from the eye region. Two example light rayspropagating from the eye region to the HOE 718 and reflecting back tothe imager 702 b are shown as solid and dashed lines. The imaging system700 (or processing module 224 or 228) can analyze the reflection datafrom the plurality of segments to multiscopically calculate thethree-dimensional shape of the eye or the gaze direction (e.g., eyepose) of the eye.

Implementations of the optical system 700 utilizing segments may havemultiple benefits. For example, the segments can be used individually,by selecting the particular segments which best suit a particular task,or they can be used collectively to multiscopically estimate thethree-dimensional shape or pose of the eye. In the former case, thisselectivity can be used to, for example, select the image of thewearer's iris which has the least occlusion by eyelids or eyelashes. Inthe latter case, the three dimensional reconstruction of the eye can beused to estimate orientation (by estimation of, for example, thelocation of the bulge of the cornea) or accommodation state (byestimation of, for example, the lens induced distortion on the apparentlocation of the pupil). Although described primarily with reference toliquid crystal polarization gratings (LCPGs), in some implementations,one or more of off-axis reflectors 1150, 708 as described above withreference to FIGS. 23-24H may take the form of other types ofdiffractive optical element/holographic optical element. Volume PhaseHolographic gratings and/or Blazed gratings or other type of diffractiveoptical elements or holographic optical elements can be used and neednot be limited to structures comprising liquid crystal. As mentionedabove, in some designs, one or more of the retinal imaging techniquesdescribed above with reference to FIGS. 13A-13B may be performed byutilizing one or more of the off-axis mirror (OAM) configurationsdescribed above with reference to FIGS. 23-24H. Additional details aredisclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/271,802, filed on Sep.21, 2016, entitled “EYE IMAGING WITH AN OFF-AXIS IMAGER”, now U.S. Pat.No. 10,466,478, issued on Nov. 5, 2019 and U.S. patent application Ser.No. 15/902,927, filed on Feb. 22, 2018, entitled “VARIABLE-FOCUS VIRTUALIMAGE DEVICES BASED ON POLARIZATION CONVERSION,” each of which is herebyincorporated by reference herein in its entirety.

Various implementations described herein can be used to reduce chromaticaberrations and/or increase a field of view of one or more cameras orimagers. As discussed above, the camera or imager may be off to the sideand may possibly be forward-facing (although may be rearward facing,e.g., in the case where an additional reflector is used). As notedabove, the camera may be disposed off to the side of the wearer's face(temporally) and may be mounted near a temple or an ear of the user(e.g., behind the eye) to image the eye. The camera may for, example, bedisposed on a temple or ear stem of the eyewear. The camera may bepointed more in the forward direction than in the rearward direction.The camera may be pointed more towards a front view of the wearer thanrearward to the wearer and/or to a rearward view of the wearer. However,as referred to above, the camera may face more rearward, for example, ifan additional reflector is used. Other configurations are possible.

The camera can be configured to image the eye, for example, the pupil,iris or glints on the eye and/or the retina of the user's eye. Light maybe reflected off a reflective element from the eye to the camera. Thereflective element may be disposed on (e.g., overlaid on) the eyepieceof the head-mounted display system. As discussed above, the eyepiece maybe transparent such that the wearer may see through the eyepiece to theenvironment in front of the user. The eyepiece, however, may include areflective element or surface. The reflective element may comprise adiffractive optical element such as a diffraction grating or aholographical optical element. The reflective element may comprise, forexample, a liquid crystal diffractive optical element such as acholesteric liquid crystal diffractive optical element and/or a liquidcrystal polarization grating although the diffractive or holographicoptical element need not be liquid crystal based and need not compriseliquid crystal. The reflective element may be a surface or volumediffractive optical element and may comprise a blazed grating in someimplementations. Optical properties may be programmed into thediffractive or holographical element such as optical power or tilt. Thereflective optical element may comprise an off-axis reflective opticalelement or off-axis mirror (OAM). Light from the eye may be received bythe reflective element, reflected therefrom, for example, away from anoptical axis of the reflective element toward to a temporally locatedcamera in some implementations. The angle of incidence need not equalthe angle of reflection as the diffractive or holographic opticalelement. As discussed above the diffractive optical element and/orholographic optical element may be diffracted the light angles larger orsmaller than the incident angle.

As referred to above, in some implementations, the reflective element orsurface can include optical power. This optical power may be positiveoptical power in some cases. Optical power in the reflective element oroff-axis mirror may increase the field-of-view of the camera andpossible enable a larger region of the retina to be imaged.

As discussed above, in some implementations, the reflective element oroff-axis mirror may be segmented. FIG. 25A schematically shows anexample illumination system 700 that includes a reflective elementcomprising plurality of segments. In the implementation shown, thesegments of the reflective elements 718 a 1, 718 a 2 may be alternatingin their optical properties. For example, a first set of segments 718 a1 may have first optical properties while a second set of segments 718 a2 may have a second optical properties different than the first opticalproperties. For example, the first set of segments may have a differentamount of tilt than the second set of segments. The two segments maytherefore provide the camera with different perspective of the eye andpossibly increase the region of the retina that can be imaged. Adistance from a center of a first segment to a center of a neighboringsecond segment may be about 0.5 microns, about 1 microns, about 1.5microns, about 2 microns, about 3 microns, about 4 microns, about 5microns, about 7 microns, about 10 microns, about 12 microns, about 15microns, about 20 microns, any value therebetween, or fall within arange having two of those values as endpoints. In some embodiments thisdistance is about 1.5 microns. Such a small distance may allow forsimultaneous images of different parts of the eye without a significantloss in image fidelity.

The reflective elements may include optical power. In someimplementations, the optical power of the first set of reflectiveelements 718 a 1 may be different from the optical power of the secondset of reflective element 718 a 2 although the optical power may be thesame in some implementations. This optical power may potentially providean increased field of view (FOV) of the camera in imaging the user'seye. Additionally or alternatively, the amount of tilt for thereflective elements 718 a 1, 718 a 2 may be different from each other.For example, the first set of reflective elements 718 a 1 may diffractlight a larger amount than the second set of reflective elements 718 a2. Such a design may provide different perspective of the eye to thecamera. Imaging the eye from different perspective may be beneficial,for example, to increase the field of view of the eye, e.g., of theretina, that is imaged as well as to facilitate determining the positionof the eye or features thereof as discussed herein.

Additionally or alternatively, one or more lenses (e.g., having positiveoptical power) may be disposed between the camera and the eye to capturea greater amount of light and/or increase the field of view of theretina, e.g., of the eye. For example, the one or more lenses, possiblyhaving positive optical power, may be disposed between the eye and thereflective element. Positive optical power may in some implementations,be introduced between the eye and the reflective element. Additionallyor alternatively, one or more lenses may be disposed between thereflective element and the camera. In some designs, a random phasepattern may be built into the system to reduce spherical aberrations inthe reflective element, for example, if the reflective element hasoptical power.

As noted above, additionally or alternatively, the reflective elementmay be segmented into two or more segments or portions having differentoptical properties such as tilt angle. In particular, different segmentsmay have different angular orientation and thus provide differentperspectives of the eye. For example, light may be collected fromdifferent fields-of-view and/or different portions of the eye anddirected to the camera by different segments. The reflective elementsmay comprise for example reflective diffractive optical elements with anoptical axis that is not identical for the two segments, for example,one segment may have an optical axis that is tilted with respect to theother to provide a different perspective. Two segments may be includedor more than two segments may be included. If more than two segments areincluded, the segments may be in a regular pattern (e.g., an alternatingpattern) of different orientation. For example, a first plurality ofsegments 718 a 1 may be configured to reflect light in a at a firstangle (e.g., at a first average angle or beam angle for a range ofangles) into and/or from the eye, and a second plurality of segments 718a 2 may be configured to reflect light at a second angle (e.g., at asecond average angle or beam angle for a range of angles) into and/orfrom the eye. The first and second segments may in some implementationsrepeat over and over alternating between the first and second segmentsand thus the first and second perspectives. If three different segmentsare included in the reflective element, the three segments may berepeated over and over as well. A larger number of different segmentshaving different perspectives or optical axes may also be used. Invarious implementations, these segments may be repeated in order overand over. Alternatively, a more irregular pattern may be used. Segmentedoptical elements such as segmented reflectors may yield image data fromtwo or more different perspectives, such as two or more of theperspectives that are similar or equivalent to the perspectives of twoor more of virtual cameras 702 c 1, 702 c 2, and 702 c 3 describedabove.

In various implementations disclosed herein, the camera 802 may disposedoff-center with respect to the eye and/or eyepiece. The camera 802 maybe disposed temporally with respect to the eye, e.g., the center of theeye, or even the edge of the eye, or of the head. The camera 802 may beintegrated into a frame of the illumination system 700, such as a templeor temple arm. In some implementations, the camera 802 may be disposedrearward of the front of the eye, of the center of the eye, or of theentire eye 304. In some implementations, the camera and/or above thecenter of eye 304 or the entire eye and may be near a wearer's temple insome cases. The camera may face forward and may be tilted inwardmedially or nasally (e.g., toward the nose). Accordingly, in someimplementations the one or more reflective elements may comprise anoff-axis reflector or off-axis reflective element. Light from the eyemay be directed by the reflective element temporally toward the sidewhere the camera is located. The angle of incidence need not be equal tothe angle of reflection. For example, light reflected from the eye maybe incident on the reflective element at an angle closer to the normalto the reflective element and may be reflected and/or diffracted at alarger angle farther from normal to the reflective element.

In some designs, the one or more reflective elements may be forward orrearward the eyepiece. The reflective element may, for example, comprisea cover for the eyepiece. In some designs the reflective element isintegrated in the eyepiece, for example, on a forward or rearwardportion thereof or integrated elsewhere within the eyepiece. Thereflective element may itself include a plurality of layers in someimplementations. For example, as shown in FIG. 25B, the one or morereflective elements may comprise two layers or reflective elements 718 a1 and 718 a 2. One layer or reflective element 718 a 1 may be closer tothe eye 304 than the other 718 a 2. The other layer or reflectiveelement 718 a 2, for example, may be closer to the world in front of theeye 304 than the other 718 a 1. In some implementations, the firstreflective element 718 a 1 may be configured to reflect and/or diffractlight at a first angle (e.g., at a first average angle for a range ofangles) into and/or from the eye 304, and a second reflective element718 a 2 may be configured to selectively reflect light at a second angle(e.g., at a second average angle for a range of angles) into and/or fromthe eye 304. However, in some implementations, the first and secondlayers or reflective elements 718 a 1 and 718 a 2 reflect light towardthe same direction and/or location such as toward the camera. In someimplementations, the first and second layers or reflective elements 718a 1 and 718 a 2 receive light from different angles, for example, fromdifferent location and direct the light to the at least one camera,which may be temporally positioned with respect to the eye (e.g., thecenter of the eye or temporal edge of the eye) and may, for example, bedisposed on the temple arm. By collecting light from differentdirections or locations, the first and second layers or reflectiveelements 718 a 1 and 718 a 2 may increase the field-of-view of thecamera and facilitate imaging different portions of the retina.

The plurality of reflective elements may reflect and/or diffract lightof the same or different wavelengths. For example, in someimplementations, the first reflective element 718 a 1 and the secondreflective element 718 a 2 may correspond to first and second layers andmay be configured to selectively reflect light, for example, of firstand second respective wavelengths. Each of the first reflective element718 a 1 and the second reflective element 718 a 2 can be configured toreflect and/or diffract light at corresponding angles or angular ranges,for example, at first and second angles (e.g., at first and secondaverage angles or beam angles for respective first and second ranges ofangles or beams). For example, the first reflective element 718 a 1 maybe configured to selectively reflect and/or diffract most light of afirst wavelength at the first angle (e.g., at a first average angle orbeam angle for a first range of angles or first beam) and selectivelytransmit most light of a second wavelength while the second reflectiveelement 718 a 2 may be configured to selectively reflect and/or diffractmost light of the second wavelength at the second angle (e.g., at asecond average angle or beam angle for a second range of angles or asecond beam) and selectively transmit most light of the firstwavelength. However, in some implementation, the first reflectiveelement 718 a 1 reflects light of a first wavelength range toward thecamera and the second reflective element 718 a 2 reflects a secondwavelength range in toward the camera. The directions that the light isdirected need not be different. More than two such reflective elementsthat selectively reflects other different wavelengths may be included indifferent designs. As discussed above, the different reflective elementsor layers may receive light from different directions and/or locationsand diffract them by different amount, for example, both to the camera.In this manner, different portions of the retina may be imaged and/orthe field of view may possibly be increased.

Another way of increasing the field of view of the camera 802 is toinclude a plurality of cameras, the respective cameras configured toimage different parts of the eye and/or the same part of the eye fromdifferent angles. FIG. 26 shows an example illumination system 700 thatincludes a first camera 802 a and a first camera 802 b configured toimage the eye 304. As shown the cameras 802 a, 802 b are separated fromone another by a distance d. In some implementations, the distance d maybe similar to a circumference of the pupil of the eye 304. For example,the distance d may be about 0.5 mm, about 1 mm, about 1.5 mm, about 2mm, about 3 mm, about 4 mm, about 5 mm, about 7 mm, about 10 mm, about12 mm, about 15 mm, about 20 mm, any value therebetween, or fall withina range having two of those values as endpoints. In some embodiments, dis about 4 mm. In some embodiments, one or both cameras 802 a, 802 b aredisposed from a point on the reflective element 718 (or elements/layers,see above) by a distance h₁. The second point may be separated from thepupil of the eye 304 by a distance h₂. The distance h₂ may be about 0.5cm, about 1 cm, about 1.5 cm, about 2 cm, about 3 cm, about 4 cm, about5 cm, about 7 cm, about 10 cm, any value therebetween, or fall within arange having two of those values as endpoints. Other values arepossible. The cameras 802 a and 802 b, located at different positions,may image the eye from different perspectives possibly providing imagesof different parts of the retina. In some case, the two cameras 802 a,802 b provide a larger field of view in the aggregate as compared to useof just one of the cameras.

To assist in imaging the eye, which can be accomplished using a varietyof different arrangements and used for various reasons, illumination ofthe eye may be provided. In some implementations, one or moreillumination sources may be included to illuminate the eye. Theillumination source may comprise emitters such as solid-state emitters.The illumination sources may include vertical-cavity surface-emittinglasers (VCSELs) and/or LEDs. For example, one or more VCSELs may be usedto illuminate one of the eyes, which may in some cases offer a source ofbright narrow band illumination. In some implementations, an array ofVCSELs may be employed. FIG. 27A shows an example illumination system700 that includes a VCSEL array 2704 coupled to and/or integrated withthe camera 802. The VCSEL array 2704 can emit illuminating light 2708 ata wavelength or wavelengths described herein, such as in the infraredrange. A VCSEL may provide particular benefit by emitting a narrow bandof wavelengths. This feature can reduce the amount of chromaticaberration resultant during the imaging for example from a reflectiveelements comprising a diffractive optical element or holographic opticalelement such as a liquid crystal based diffractive optical element suchas a cholesteric liquid crystal diffractive optical element or liquidcrystal polarization grating, etc. VCSELs also provide relatively highbrightness while having a relatively small footprint. Accordingly, oneor more VCSELs may be disposed (e.g., mounted) on the camera orintegrated therein (e.g., as shown in FIG. 27A) or between multiplecamera such as a pair of cameras. The number and arrangement of VCSELsthat can be integrated with the camera or cameras can vary. In oneimplementation, nine VCSELs can be included with two cameras. Forexample, eight VSCELs can surround the two cameras or at least the inputof the two cameras. One VCSEL may be between the two cameras. More orless VCSELs and/or cameras may be integrated together. In someimplementations, an array of 20 VCSELs may be used. The VCSELs mayinclude one or more lens to shape the output of the beam. The VCSELsand/or camera may be included temporally with respect to the eyepiece,the eye (e.g., the center of the eye or the temporal side of the eye)and may for example be mounted on the frame such as the temple or templearm.

In some implementations the VCSELs are imaged in front of the eye (e.g.,forming a magnified image of the VCSEL). In some cases, diverging lightfrom the VCSEL can create a spot on the retina. In some implementations,different VCSELs in the plurality or array create an illuminationpattern (e.g., the same illumination pattern) in front of the eye. Lightfrom the different VCSELs may, for example, be incident on thereflective element/off-axis mirror with the same angle of incidence. Onedifference (e.g., the primary difference) may be the illumination source(e.g., VCSEL) is translated to different lateral positions, which maycover different parts of the eye box. In some designs, different partsof the VCSEL array (e.g., different VCSELs) can be turned on and off orotherwise have the intensity of their output changed. Likewise,different parts of the VCSEL array can be turned on with respect to eyeposition. Electronics configured to control the output of the VCSELs maybe employed to selectively adjust the output (e.g., turn on and off) thedifferent pixels.

Additionally or alternatively, one or more VCSELs can be disposed onand/or integrated into the reflective element 718 (e.g., as shown inFIG. 27B) or the eyepiece or one or more layers (e.g., a substrate)disposed thereon or integrated therewith. For example, in someembodiments the VCSELs 2704 may be disposed in a first layer of aneyepiece and the reflective element 718 comprise a second layer. TheVCSELs 2704 can be disposed nearer the eye 304 than the reflectiveelement 718 as shown in FIG. 27B or vice versa. In some implementation,the VCSELs 2704 are disposed on a cover, cover layer, or cover glasslayer. The layer on which the VCSELs may be disposed may be transparentto at least some visible light such that the wearer can see through thelayer to the world in front of the wearer. In some implementations, theVCSELs 2704 may be disposed on the reflective element 718 in someembodiments. Other designs are possible. The VCSELs 2704 may be includedin a VCSEL array in some implementations such as a 1D or 2D array. Invarious implementations, for example, whether the VCSELs are mounted onthe reflective element 718 or another layer, the VCSELs may have a smallsize (e.g., footprint or cross-sectional area as seen from the outputend of the VCSEL) and may be spaced apart sufficiently such that thewearer can see through the layer to the world in front of the wearer.

As discussed above the reflective layer 718 may comprise a diffractiveoptical element or holographic optical element such as a grating. Insome implementations the diffractive optical element or holographicoptical element may comprise liquid crystal such as a liquid crystalgrating (e.g., liquid crystal polarization grating) and may comprisecholesteric liquid crystal, e.g., a cholesteric liquid crystal grating.In some implementation, the diffractive optical element or holographicoptical element may comprise a volume or surface diffractive opticalelement or holographic optical element or grating such as a blazeddiffractive optical element or holographic optical element, e.g., blazedgrating. As discussed above, the reflective layer 718 may comprise anoff-axis mirror or reflective element. Light from the eye may bereflected to a camera locate temporally with respect to the eye, e.g.,the center of the eye or the temporal edge of the eye. For example, thecamera may be disposed on the temple or temple arm. In someimplementations, the angle of incidence does not equal the angle ofreflection. In some implementations, the reflective element includesoptical power (and/or tilt) which may, for example, be programed intothe diffractive or holographic optical element.

In some implementation, regardless of where disposed, the VCSEL mayinclude one or more optical element such as a lens, polarizer (e.g.linear polarizer), retarder (e.g., quarter wave retarder) or anycombination disposed thereon and/or in the path of light output from theVCSEL. In some implementations, the light from the VCSEL (possiblypassing through a lens) may have a divergence of less than ±20°, ±15°,±10°, ±5°, ±1°, or any range between any of these values. In somedesigns, one or more VCSELs may be modulated such as with pulse widthmodulation (PWM), which reduce coherent artifacts, such as laserspeckle. Modulation may reduce the temporal coherence of the VCSEL(s).Accordingly, electronics may be included to modulate the VCSEL or othersolid state emitter. Additionally, in configurations where multipleVCSELs are included, the output of different VCSELs can be altered, forexample turned on or shut off using, for example, electronics that powerand/or control the VCSELs.

In various designs, the camera may be configured to image the retinawhile reducing collection of light reflected from the cornea. Glint fromthe cornea may, for example, introduce glare that makes imaging of theretina more difficult. (See, for example, discussion above with respectto FIG. 15B for additional disclosure.) In some implementations, the eyemay be illuminated with polarized light and the camera may be configuredto attenuate light of that polarization. A first polarizer, for example,a first linear polarizer, may be disposed on or integrated into theillumination source (e.g., VCSEL) if, for example, the illuminationsource is not configured to output suitably polarized light. Inaddition, one or more polarizers (e.g., linear polarizers) may bedisposed between the camera and the user's eye. For example, a secondpolarizer may be disposed between the camera and the reflective element,for example, at the camera. In some configurations, the second polarizeris mounted on the imaging device. Light reflected off the specularlyreflective corneal surface will retain its incident polarization, e.g.,the first polarization of the light source. Conversely, light reflectedfrom the diffusely reflective retina will not retain its polarizationbut the light scattered therefrom will include multiple polarizationsboth the first polarization as well as an orthogonal secondpolarization. Likewise, a polarizer such as a linear polarizer at thecamera that block the light of the first polarization can be used toblock the specular light reflected from the cornea. Some light diffuselyreflected from the retina, however, will comprise the second orthogonalpolarization and will reach the camera providing an image of the retinawith reduced glare from light reflected from the cornea. The polarizerat the camera may be a transmissive or reflective polarizer. In someimplementations where the VCSELs are located such that light from theVCSEL reflects from the reflect element to the eye, the VCSEL need notinclude a polarizer, e.g., a linear polarizer. For example, the VCSELsmay be mounted temporally with respect to the eye (e.g., the center ofthe eye or the temporal edge of the eye) such as on the temple or templearm, possibly with the camera. In some designs, the reflective elementmay include polarization selectivity and operate as a linear polarizersuch as when the reflective element comprises liquid crystal, e.g., aliquid crystal polarization grating. As discussed above, however, thereflective element 718 may comprise a surface grating such as a blazedgrating and the a VCSELs may include one or more polarizers (e.g., alinear polarizer) to polarize the light if the VCSEL does not outputpolarized light (e.g., linearly polarized light).

In some designs, to reduce the effects of chromatic aberrationintroduced by the reflective element or off-axis mirror (e.g., if thereflective element comprises a diffractive optical element such as adiffractive optical element having optical power), an additionalcorrective diffractive optical element may be provided to introducecounteracting chromatic dispersion. FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B show variousexample arrangements of an illumination system 700 that includes acorrective diffractive optical element 2804. As shown in FIG. 28A andFIG. 28B, the corrective diffractive optical element maybe disposedbetween the camera 802 and the reflective element 718 (e.g., as aseparate reflector between the camera and the reflective element, or asan additional diffractive optical element integrated with the reflectiveelement). The diffractive optical element 2804 can be configured tocorrect, reduce, or counter chromatic aberration from the reflectiveelement. In some embodiments, the corrective diffractive optical element2804 includes a hologram or diffractive optical element which may beprogrammed with suitable chromatic dispersion to counter or reduce thechromatic aberration of the reflective optical element 718. Thecorrective diffractive optical element 2804 may be transmissive orreflective. In some implementations, the corrective diffractive opticalelement 2804 has a similar or same pitch as the reflective element 718.In some implementations, one or more additional powered optical elementssuch as a refractive optical element 2808 (e.g., a lens or lenses) maybe disposed between the camera and the reflective element (e.g., asshown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B) and/or between the reflective elementand the user's eye, such as in implementations where the reflectiveelement has optical power. This additional powered optical element 2808may be configured, e.g., have optical power and be positioned toincrease collimation of light onto the diffractive optical elementand/or camera in certain designs.

In some implementations, a beam splitter 2812 (which may comprise apartially reflective partially transmissive optical element) can beincluded in the illumination system 700. In some implementations, thebeamsplitter comprises a 50/50 beamsplitter. The beam splitter 2812 mayhave one or more characteristics of the partially reflective elementdescribed above with respect to FIG. 12C. The beam splitter 2812 can beconfigured to transmit the image light 2710 while also reflecting someof the illuminating light 2708 back toward the diffractive opticalelement 2804. The resulting light entering the camera 802 can be acombination of image light 2710 and illuminating light 2708.

In some designs, a plurality of cameras (e.g., two camera laterallyoffset from one another or an array of cameras) may be used to captureimages of the eye. Thus, although reference to “the camera,” “theimaging device,” or “the imager” may be used herein, each of these mayrefer to a plurality of such devices. For example, a first camera canimage a first portion of the eye and a second camera can image a second(overlapping or non-overlapping) portion of the eye. Multiple camerasthat can provide multiple perspectives and/or multiple images of the eyecan increase the field-of-view of the imaging capability of the system.As discussed below, images from multiple perspective can be used toprovide information regarding the eye such as position. Other types ofinformation, such as gaze, movement, etc. can also be obtained. Imagesof the first and second portions of the eye can in some cases be used toimprove the accuracy and/or speed at which the eye can be imaged and/orgaze, position, movement of the eye or any combination thereof can betracked. Additional details of the plurality of cameras can be foundabove with reference to FIG. 26 .

Although description various designs employed VCSELs has been providedherein, other types of emitters such as other types of solid stateemitters may alternatively be used in such designs and may have similarfeatures, configurations and arrangements.

In some designs, a plurality of cameras (e.g., two camera laterallyoffset from one another or an array of cameras) may be used to captureimages of the eye. Thus, although reference to “the camera,” “theimaging device,” or “the imager” may be used herein, each of these mayrefer to a plurality of such devices. For example, a first camera canimage a first portion of the eye and a second camera can image a second(overlapping or non-overlapping) portion of the eye. Multiple camerasthat can provide multiple perspectives and/or multiple images of the eyecan increase the field-of-view of the imaging capability of the system.Images of the first and second portions of the eye can, for example, beused to improve the accuracy and/or speed at which the eye can be imagedand/or gaze, position, movement of the eye or any combination thereofcan be tracked.

Determining the Location of the Center of the Eyeball

Various imaging systems described above may be used to capture imagesusable for determining the position of the eye or a part or feature ofthe eye such as location of the center of eyeball of a user a headmounted display. Knowing the center of the eyeball or the center ofrotation of the eye may be useful in presenting image content to theuser for augmented and virtual reality. In some implementations, forexample, image content is presented from the vantage point of the centerof rotation of the eye, for example, a location where a camera imagingthe image content would be located. Other uses for the center ofrotation or eyeball center are also possible. In some implementationsdescribed herein retinal imaging systems may be used to determine theposition of the eye and/or track eye gaze. These imaging systems mayinclude a plurality of cameras configured to capture images of differentportions of the retina of an eye of the user from various angles and/ordistances. In some implementations, one or more images of the retina(e.g., different portions of the retina) may be used to determine thethree-dimensional (3D) position of the center pupil of the eye of theuser (herein referred to as “pupil center”). In some suchimplementations, the 3D position of the pupil center may be used toestimate the 3D position of the center of the eye of the user (here inreferred to as “eyeball center”). The 3D position of the pupil centerand of the eyeball center may be estimated or determined with respect toa reference frame, for example, of the plurality of cameras used tocapture the images of the retina.

In some implementations, the plurality of cameras may obtain images ofthe retina from different perspectives and use the information in therespective images and/or the relative location of the cameras todetermine the location of the pupil center. In some implementations, theposition of the pupil center may be triangulated based on informationextracted from the images of the retina. In some other implementations,one camera may obtain an image of the retina comprising regions orportions associated with different perspectives of the retina. In theseimplementations, the position of the pupil center may be triangulatedbased on information extracted from the different portions or regions ofthe images of the retina.

In some implementations, the system may include processing electronics(e.g., the controller 560) configured to identify a portion of differentimages that corresponds to a portion of the retina of the user's eye.For example, a portion of an image that contains blood vessels may beselected and compared to a map of the retina of the user's eye (hereinreferred to as “retinal map”) to verify that the selected portion of theimages matches with a region of the retinal map by comparing thecorresponding blood vessel shapes and/or arrangements. The map of theretina of the eye of the user or retinal map may be generated by acomputing system of the HMD during a calibration process. During suchcalibration process a plurality of different spatially located targetsmay be presented to the eye via the display while images of the retinaare captured. The targets are located in different portions of thefield-of-view of the user causing the user to alter the gaze directionof their eye. Images of the retina are capture when the eye is atdifferent gaze positions providing different views of the retina therebyenabling images of different portions of the retina to be captured.

In some implementations, during the calibration process the computingsystem of the HMD may also calculate and/or generate a gaze directionmapping matrix based on the association of different retinal imagescaptured from different perspectives and the corresponding gazedirections. The gaze direction mapping matrix, may be used to estimatethe gaze direction of an eye when the retina of the eye is imaged todetermine the position of the center of pupil of the eye. Subsequently,the estimated gaze direction may be used to calculate the position ofthe center of eye ball.

A portion of the retina can be identified in the image of the retina anda center of mass (or centroid) for the identified retinal portion can becalculated. If multiple (e.g., two) cameras are employed, the center ofmass (or centroid) values are determined for the same retinal portionidentified in different images by the respective cameras. The processingelectronics (e.g., a computing system of the HMD), may use the center ofmasses, or one or more positions or distances associate therewith, todetermine the location of the pupil center possibly using triangulationtechniques. In some implementations, the system may further determinethe location of the center of the eyeball or eyeball center (EBC) orcenter of rotation of the eye based at least in part on the determinedthe location of the pupil center or other parameters determined throughthe use of these techniques.

These techniques can additionally or alternatively be used with asingle-camera configuration. For example, the camera may obtain multipleimages of the eye at different times. Based on these images, the systemcan determine a position of the pupil center. Additionally, oralternatively, a camera may determine the position of the pupil based onone or more images obtained from a segmented optical element such as asegmented reflective element. For example, various designs are disclosedherein where the system is capable of capturing an image that includesportions of the retina obtained from two or more different perspectives.Some such designs, for example, employ a segmented optical element suchas a segmented reflective element (where different segments providedifferent tilts, reflection angles, diffraction angles and/orperspectives). In some examples, the segmented optical element orsegmented reflective element may be an off-axis refractive element thatreflects light incident on the element at a reflection angle differentfrom an angle of incidence of light. Similarly, if a plurality ofperspectives are provided by a plurality of reflective elements withdifferent tilts, such as reflective elements that reflect differentrespective wavelengths and have different tilts or orientations andperspectives, the triangulation technique described herein may beemployed based on the respective different images obtained. As discussedabove, a plurality of reflective elements with different tilts thatoperate on the same or different wavelengths can be included in or withthe eyepiece, one farther from the eye than the other. These reflectiveelements may comprise diffractive optical element (DOE) or holographicoptical elements (HOE) with different amounts of tilt programmed intothe DOE or HOE. In such cases, the tilt refers to deflection of the beamas a result of diffraction. Diffractive or holographic features such aslines of a grating are configured, e.g., shaped and spaced with respectto each other, to redirect light incident thereon at an angle akin tothe tilting of a beam. This tilt need not be produced by a tiltedsurface but may be produce interferometrically and/or via diffraction.In some implementations, a dual camera configuration can be employed toprovide the images of the retina from said two perspectives. These imagepairs may be used to determine features of the eye such as the locationof pupil position and eye ball center. In various implementationsdescribed herein, a segmented optical element such as a segmentedreflector is employed. Such a segmented optical element may comprise adiffractive optical element with segments formed by differentdiffractive regions. Additionally, reflective optical elements describedherein may comprise reflective surfaces. However, reflective opticalelements may produce reflection via a volume effect. For example, avolume hologram or volume diffractive optical element may be reflectiveand be reflective optical elements. Other types of reflective opticalelements are possible.

In various implementations, a lateral distance between a center of mass(or centroid) of an image of the retina of an eye and the center of theimage sensor or sensor field used to capture the image of the retina maybe employed to determine ratio between a lateral distance between thepupil center and the center of the sensor or sensor field and alongitudinal distance between the pupil center and the optical center ofthe camera lens (or imaging system). The center of the sensor or sensorfield may be determined by the center of the camera lens or imagingsystem for example by the optical axis thereof, in some cases forexample. Other reference points besides the center of the sensor orsensor field may be used in other implementations.

FIG. 29 illustrates an example configuration for capturing images of aretina of an eye usable for determining the location of pupil center ofthe eye with respect to a reference coordinate system such as acoordinate system of the camera. The camera 2910 may be an infinityfocused camera. A camera focused at infinity can offer an advantage ofbeing able to image the retina as light from the retina is collimated bythe natural lens of the eye; however, the camera focused at infinitywill not bring into focus features such as eyelashes or the eyelid. Thecamera 2910 may include a lens system 2909 (e.g., one or more lenses)with a focal length or effective focal length of f₂ and an image sensor2911 (e.g., a sensor array like a CCD sensor comprising a plurality orarray of light sensitive pixels). The image sensor 2911 may be parallelto an image plane of the lens system 2909 in various designs. The lenssystem 2909 projects an image of a portion the retina 211 of the eye 210on the image sensor 2911, e.g., onto the array of pixels. The portion ofthe retina imaged on the senor 2911 may depend on one or more of arelative distance and orientation between the eye 210 and camera 2910,the size of the optical aperture of the eye 210 through which the retina211 is imaged (e.g., the diameter of the pupil 2902), the size of theaperture (D₂) of the lens system 2909, the focal length of the lenssystem 2909 and the focal length of the lens of the eye 210. At least insome cases, the size and the location of the image on the image sensormay depend on a lateral (L) and a longitudinal distance (h) between theoptical center of the lens system 2909 and the pupil center 2903. Forillustrative purposes, FIG. 29 shows light rays extending to the marginof the portion of retina that can be projected on the image sensor. Inthe example shown in FIG. 29 the position of a first ray 2906 is limitedby a first edge the pupil 2902 and a first edge of the aperture of lenssystem 2909, and a position of a second ray 2904 is limited by a secondedge of the pupil 2902 and a second edge of the aperture of lens system2909. The projection of corresponding rays 2904 and 2906 on the imagesensor 2911 are schematically shown in FIG. 29 as defining the marginsof the projected image on the image sensor 2911. In some examples, acoordinate system whose origin is located at an optical center of thelens system 2909 (which is part of camera 2910) may be used to find arelation between f₂, D₂, D₁, lateral positions of the margins of theprojected image and lateral and longitudinal positions of the pupilcenter with respect to the camera 2910. In the example shown, the originof the xyz coordinate system is located at the optical center 2908 ofthe lens system 2909, x-axis (shown) and y-axis (out the paper) areparallel with an image plane of the image sensor 2911 and the z-axis(shown) is perpendicular to the image plane. With respect to suchcoordinate system the lateral distance (e.g., the x coordinates) of themargins of the image projected onto the image plane of the sensor 2911may be given by:

$\begin{matrix}{X_{b} = {\frac{f_{2}}{h}\left( {L + \frac{D_{1} + D_{2}}{2}} \right)}} & (1)\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}{X_{a} = {\frac{f_{3}}{h}\left( {L - \frac{D_{1} + D_{2}}{2}} \right)}} & (2)\end{matrix}$where X_(a) and X_(b) are the x coordinates of the first margin andsecond margin of the projected image (e.g., image of the retina) on theimage sensor 2911, his the z coordinate of the pupil center, L is the xcoordinate of the pupil center, D₁ is the diameter of the aperture(e.g., the entrance aperture) of the lens system 2909 and D₂ is thediameter of the aperture of the eye (e.g., the diameter of the pupil2902.

The configuration illustrated if FIG. 29 is optically equivalent to theimaging system 24A where camera (e.g., the camera 702 b) is facingforward (e.g., in the direction of the eye vision) and captures theimage of the retina 211 via an reflective optical element (e.g., anoff-axis mirror 708 or an off-axis diffractive element, an off-axisholographic mirror) positioned in front of the eye 211 and the camera.In such a configuration, the camera 2910 may be a virtual image of theforward-facing camera (e.g., virtual image 702 c in FIG. 24B) or avirtual camera as described above with respect to FIG. 24A. As such,Equations 1 and 2 may be used to determine the margins of an imageformed on an image sensor of a forward-facing camera with respect to acoordinate system associated with the corresponding virtual camera (avirtual image of the forward facing camera formed by the reflectingoptical element).

In some cases, X_(a) and X_(b) may be used to determine the coordinate(e.g., x coordinate) of a center of mass for the image of the retinaformed on the image sensor 2911:

$\begin{matrix}{X_{CM} = {\frac{X_{b} + X_{a}}{2} = \frac{{Lf}_{2}}{h}}} & (3)\end{matrix}$

Equation 3 shows that for a given value of f₂ (the effective focallength of the lens system 2909), the ratio L/h may be calculated usingthe x coordinate of the center of mass X_(CM) of the image. The xcoordinate of the center of mass X_(CM) of an image (image of theretina) formed on the image sensor 2911 can be determined by measuringthe distance between the margins (e.g., extreme margins in x direction)of the image and a center of the image sensor 2913 defined, for example,by the cross-section between the image plane (or sensor plane) and thez-axis (or the optical axis of the lens system 2909). Other approachedto measuring the center of mass may be employed as well. As such, L/hmay be determined uniquely determined by the image data associated withan image of retina captured by the camera 2910.

In some implementations, two cameras at different positions relative tothe eye 210 may capture two images of the retina 211, where images fromthe respective cameras corresponds to different perspectives of theretina viewed from a different angle; as such a different center of massmay be measured for captured images from the two cameras, respectively.In some cases, the center of mass may be with respect to a jointcoordinate system defined based on the position of the two camerashowever other approaches are possible. Since Equation 3 is valid for thecenter of masses of both images, the values of L and h may be uniquelydetermined using the coordinates of the two centers of masses calculatedfor the two respective images from the two cameras. As a result, variousconfigurations, may use two images of the retina captured from differentangles or perspectives, to determine the 3D location of the pupil center(i.e., L and h) possibly with respect to a joint coordinate system ofthe cameras (or the corresponding virtual cameras) used to capture theimages.

As described above, in some implementations, a single virtual camera(e.g., the camera 2910) may receive light rays from the retina 211 fromtwo different perspectives or directions. For example, a forward-facingcamera 702 b of an imaging system (e.g., imaging system shown in FIG.24F or 24H), may image the retina of the eye via a segmented opticalelement such as a segmented reflecting (or diffracting) optical element(e.g., a reflecting/refracting element with multiple off-axisreflecting/diffracting segments). As a result, the camera 702 b mayreceive multiple (e.g., partially duplicative) images of the retina viadifferent segments of the segmented reflecting optical element wheredifferent images are received from different directions and correspondsto different perspectives of the retina seen via the pupil. In suchimaging systems, the segmented reflecting optical element may generatemultiple virtual cameras. Using at least two virtual cameras generatedby two segments of a reflecting optical element, the two images of theretina may be captured from different perspective and used to determinethe 3D position of the pupil center. The images captured by the twovirtual cameras may be included in a single image captured by the actualsingle camera (e.g., they may be two regions or portions of the singleimage). The imaging optics (e.g., one or more lenses on the cameraand/or the reflective optical element, which may be powered) may imagethe same portion of the retina on different portions of the sensorarray. The locations of the center of mass of those portions of theretina may be determined such as described above to calculate theposition of the eye, e.g., of the pupil. The number of segments and/orperspectives and/or portions of the retina evaluated may vary and, morespecifically, may be larger than two in different implementations. Othervariations are possible. For example, as described above, the segmentedreflecting optical element may include a plurality of sets of reflectingor diffracting segments, wherein the different sets have differentrespective tilts (e.g., or diffractive properties) to provide differentperspective and views of the retina such as shown in FIG. 25A.

As described above, once the 3D position of the pupil center isdetermined the 3D position of the eyeball center (EBC) may be calculatedusing the 3D position of the pupil center and a gaze direction mappingmatrix determined, for example, during a calibration process.

FIG. 30 illustrates an example of a configuration for capturing twoimages of the retina 211 from two different perspectives. In thisexample, two cameras may be used to capture the two images of the retina211. A first camera may include a first optical imaging system or firstlens system or first camera lens 3009 a and a first image sensor 3011 a,and a second camera may include a second optical imaging system or asecond lens system or second camera lens 3009 b and a second imagesensor 3011 b. In some examples, the first camera 3010 a and the secondcamera 3010 b may be identical. In some examples, the first and thesecond camera may be infinity focused cameras (cameras set to focus onan infinite distance from the image sensor plane). For example, theimage sensor may be disposed a focal length away from the camera lens.In some such examples, a focal length of first and the second lenssystem may be equal to f₂. In some implementations, the first camera3010 a and the second camera 3010 b may be virtual cameras. In some suchimplementations, the first camera 3010 a and the second camera 3010 bmay be virtual cameras associated with two forward facing cameras (e.g.,the mirror images of one or more forward facing cameras generated by areflective optical element such as an off-axis mirror or off-axisdiffractive element). In some such implementations, the first camera3010 a and the second camera 3010 b may be virtual cameras associatedwith a single camera and may be generated by a segmented reflectingoptical element (e.g., the mirror images of one or more forward facingcameras generate by an off-axis mirror or off-axis diffractive element;similar to the example shown in FIG. 24F).

In the example shown in FIG. 30 , the first camera 3010 a and the secondcamera 3010 b are positioned side-by-side such that their image sensors3011 a/3011 b (and therefore image planes) are parallel to each other.In some cases, the first and the second image sensors 3011 a/3011 b maybe in the same plane. In some examples, a joint reference frame(coordinate system) xyz may be defined whose origin is located on aplane parallel to image sensors (image planes) and at a middle pointbetween a first optical center 3008 a of the first lens system and theoptical center of the second lens system 3008 b. For example, the xcoordinate of the first optical center 3008 a may be +D/2 and the xcoordinate system of the second optical center maybe −D/2 resulting in atotal distance of D between the two optical centers 3008 a/3008 b alongthe x-axis (shown). The x-y plane of the xyz coordinate system (y intothe paper) may be parallel to the image sensors. A center 3016 a of thefirst image sensor 3011 a may be defined as the intersection of theoptical axis of the first lens system or first camera lens and the imageplane of the first image sensor and a center 3016 b of the second imagesensor 3011 b may be defined the intersection of the optical axis of thesecond lens system or second camera lens and the image plane of thesecond image sensor. In some implementations, other joint coordinatesystems or joint reference frames or other coordinate systems orreference frames may be selected. For example, the origin of a jointcoordinate system may be closer to one camera and/or between the imagesensors 3011 a/3011 b and the optical centers 3008 a/3008 b.

The first lens system 3008 a may project a first image of the retina 211on the first image sensor 3011 a from a first perspective. The secondlens system 3008 b may project a second image of the retina 211 on thesecond image sensor 3011 b from a second perspective. In some examples,the location of the center of mass for the first and the second imagesof the retina may be measured from the center 3016 a of the first imagesensor 3011 a and the center 3016 b of the second image sensor 3011 brespectively. In some other examples, the location of the center of massfor the first and the second images of the retina may be measured from afirst reference point on the first image sensor 3011 a and a secondreference point on the second image sensor 3011 b, respectively.Accordingly, other reference points may be used besides the center ofthe image sensor in certain implementations. In the example shown, X₁and Y₁ are the x and y coordinates of the center of mass of the firstimage 3014 a with respect to the center 3016 a of the first image sensor3011 a, and X₂ and Y₂ are the x and y coordinates of the center of massof the second image 3014 b with respect to the center 3016 b of thesecond image sensor 3011 b. In some other examples, the X₁ and Y₁ may bethe x and y coordinates of the center of mass of a selected portion ofthe first image 3014 a with respect to the center 3016 a of the firstimage sensor 3011 a, and X₂ and Y₂ may be the x and y coordinates of thecenter of mass of a selected portion the second image 3014 b withrespect to the center 3016 b of the second image sensor 3011 b. In somesuch examples, the portions of the first image and the second image 3014a/3014 b may be selected based on a retinal pattern (for example, eachportion may include a specific retinal pattern). In some cases, theretinal pattern may be associated with one or more blood vessels of theretina. The selected portions may have any shape (e.g., rectangular,circular, triangular, polygonal, and the like). Using Equation 3, the xcoordinates of the centers of mass of the first 3014 a and the second3014 b image may be expressed as:

$\begin{matrix}{X_{1} = {f_{2} \star \frac{\frac{D}{2} - L_{x}}{h}}} & (3)\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}{X_{2} = {f_{2} \star \frac{\frac{D}{2} + L_{x}}{h}}} & (4)\end{matrix}$

Similar equations may be relate Y₁ and Y₂ to f₂, D/2, L_(y) and h. Here,L_(x), L_(y) and h are the x, y and z coordinated of the pupil centerwith respect to the joint xyz reference frame. Using Equation 3, 4 andsimilar equations for Y₁ and Y₂, the 3D coordinates of the pupil centerwith respect to the joint reference frame may be calculated as afunction of measured coordinates of the centers of mass of the first andthe second image, f₂ and D:

$\begin{matrix}{h = \frac{f_{2}D}{X_{1} + X_{2}}} & (5)\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}{L_{x} = {\frac{D}{2} \star \frac{X_{2} - X_{1}}{X_{2} + X_{1}}}} & (6)\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}{L_{y} = {\frac{D}{2}\frac{Y_{1} + Y_{2}}{X_{1} + X_{2}}}} & (7)\end{matrix}$

The values of D and f₂ may be known and stored in a memory of acomputing system of the HMD (e.g., during manufacturing). In someimplementations, the computing system may use the two images of retinacaptured from two different perspectives to calculate X₁, X₂, Y₁ and Y₂.Using the calculated values of X₁, X₂, Y₁ and Y₂ and the known values ofD and h, the computing system may determine the 3D position of the pupilcenter by calculating L_(x), L_(y) and h using Equations 5, 6 and 7. Insome implementation, more images may be employed, for example, toincrease accuracy.

In the example described above, a portion of the image may beidentified, such as a particular recognizable arrangement of bloodvessels and that portion may be identified in multiple images. Thecenter of mass of the portion may be used in the calculations.

In some implementations, X_(i) and Y_(i) (i=1,2) may be x-y coordinatesof the center of mass of the entire retina image projected on the imagesensor. The boundary of such image may be determined or limited by theaperture of the camera (e.g., the lens system of the camera) and/or thediameter of the pupil of the eye whose retina is images. In someexamples, the image may have a circular or oval boundary and the centerof mass may be located at the center of the circle or the oval. In somecases, the boundary of such an image may not be sharp. A sharp boundaryhowever may be determined, for example, by fitting a circle, oval,polygon or other shape to more blurry image boundary.

In some implementations, a single camera may be used to capture aportion of the retina from two different perspectives. In suchimplementation, the camera may be a forward-facing camera that capturesimages of the retina via a segmented reflective element. As describedabove, e.g., with respect to FIGS. 24E, 24F, and 24H, a segmentedreflective element (e.g., a segmented off-axis mirror or a segmentedoff-axis holographic mirror) may generate virtual cameras (i.e., virtualimages of the single camera), at different angular locations and therebyenable capturing multiple views of the retina associated with adifferent respective perspectives or views of the retina. In someexamples, different segments of the reflecting optical element mayproject different perspectives of the retina on different regions of theimage sensor of the camera. In various implementations, a portion of theretina imaged may be identified based, for example, on the pattern ofblood vessels (e.g., their shape, size, arrangement or any combinationthereof). In some examples, different segments of the reflecting and/ordiffracting optical element may project different perspectives of theretina on different regions of the image sensor of the camera.Accordingly, multiple portions may be identified in the imaging havingthis pattern of blood vessels as the camera images this part of theretina and the associate pattern of blood vessels from two perspectivesvia the two different segments. The center of mass of this pattern inboth locations may be determined to obtain X₁, Y₁ and X₂, Y₂. In someimplementations, these portions are framed by a polygon or otherboundary and the center of mass of this frame is used in thecalculations. Other approaches are possible. A similar process may beemployed when a single camera is employed with two reflective orrefractive or diffractive elements (possibly for same or differentwavelengths) that introduce different amounts of tilt to project lightfrom different parts of the retina to the camera. In some examples, thetwo reflective or diffractive or refractive optical elements may beoff-axis reflective or diffractive or refractive optical elements.

Similarly, in the case where a segmented reflective (or diffractive orrefractive) element is employed with a single camera, X_(i) and Y_(i)(i=1, 2) may be x-y coordinates of the center of mass of the entireretina image projected on the image sensor via the two segments. Asdiscussed above, the boundary of such image may be determined or limitedby the aperture of the camera (e.g., the lens system of the camera)and/or the diameter of the pupil of the eye whose retina is images. Insome examples, the image may comprise two circular or oval boundariesthat overlap or merged to some extent. The center of mass or centroidmay still be located at the center of the circle or the oval shapes thatare discernable. As discussed above, in some cases, the boundary of suchan image may not be sharp. A sharp boundary however may be determined,for example, by fitting partial circle, oval, polygon shapes to the moreblurry image boundary. A similar process may be employed when a singlecamera is employed with two reflective (e.g., diffractive) elements(possibly for same or different wavelengths) that introduce differentamounts of tilt, for example, via diffraction to provide differentperspectives of the retina for example directing light from differentportions of the retina to the same camera.

In some implementations, a plurality of images may be captured by thefirst and the second camera (or by a single camera in combination with areflective or diffractive optical element such as an off-axis mirrorwith multiple segments having different amounts of tile to providedifferent perspectives or a single camera in combination with multiplereflective elements that provide different amounts of tilt) to calculatea plurality of values for L_(x), L_(y) and h (each value associated witha pair of images captured by a different camera or possibly associatedwith a multiple instances of a portion of the retina captured in asingle image captured by a single camera). The computing system of theHMD may also calculate an averaged value for L_(x), L_(y) and h usingthe plurality of calculated values. Advantageously, using this method amore accurate value may be obtained for the 3D location of the pupilcenter. In some implementations, a plurality of camera pairs may be usedwhere each pair may capture two retina images from two differentperspectives. In some such implementations, a pair of cameras may beused with a segmented off-axis reflective optical components to generatea plurality of virtual camera pairs where each pair may capture at leastone portion of the retina that are imaged from two differentperspectives that is used for calculations.

As referred to above the camera(s) used for capturing the requiredretina images for calculating the 3D position of the pupil center, maybe infinity focused cameras. Advantageously, using infinity focusedcameras may reduce the sensitivity of the calculated 3D positions of thepupil center to relative movement between the user's eye and the HMD.

As discussed above, in some implementations, the computing system mayselect a portion of an image of the retina (e.g., based on a retinalpattern included in the selected portion). In these implementations, X₁,X₂, Y₁ and Y₂ may be the x-y coordinates of the selected image portions.FIG. 31 is a flow diagram showing an example of a method that may beused by a computing system of the HMD to estimate coordinates of acenter of mass of a portion of a retina image captured by a camera(e.g., a camera mounted on the HMD).

The process 3100 begins at block 3102 where the computing system obtainsan image of the retina of the eye of the user (e.g., a wearer of theHMD) from a first perspective. In some cases, the computing system mayobtain the image from a memory of the computing system or the cameraused to capture the image. In some cases, the computing system, maytrigger the camera (e.g., by sending a signal) to capture an image ofthe retina and transfer the image to the computing system. In someimplementations, the camera may be forward-facing camera mounted on theHMD, for example, on a frame of the HMD in proximity to the wearer'stemple (e.g., on a frame 64 of the wearable display system 200, FIG. 2 ,for example, an ear stem or temple). As mentioned above, an off-axisreflective optical element (e.g., an off-axis mirror, an off-axisdiffractive element, an off-axis holographic mirror and the like)disposed on the waveguide display of the HMD in front of theforward-facing camera and the eye may redirect light rays reflected fromthe retina to the camera and thereby enable imaging the retina using theforward-facing camera (as shown, for example, in FIG. 24A or 24H).

At block 3104, the computing system may find a retina pattern in theretina image obtained at block 3102. In some cases, the retinal patternmay be a predetermined retina pattern. In some cases, the computingsystem may select a portion of the retina image that includes theretinal pattern. The selected portion of the retina may have arectangular, circular, triangular or other shapes. In some cases, theretinal pattern may be associated with retinal blood vessels in theselected portion of the retina image. In some examples, the computingsystem may modify a contrast, a color balance or other parameters of theimage. In some such examples, the image may be modified or filteredusing one or more digital image processing algorithms. Image noisereductions can be employed in one or more various stages of processesdescribed herein. In some cases, Frangi filtering and/or Meijeringmethod can be employed in one or more process described herein.

At block 3106, the computing system may cross correlate the selectedportion at block 3104 of the retinal image with a calibrated retina mapsaved in a memory of the computing system to determine whether theretinal pattern found at block 3104 and/or the selected portion matchesor sufficiently matches with a region in the calibrated retina map. Insome examples, the computing system may generate a score indicating alevel of correlation between the retinal pattern (or the selectedportion) with a region in the calibrated retina map.

As described above, the calibrated retina map may be generated andstored during a calibration process when a plurality of targets images(e.g., virtual target images) are presented to the user via the displayof the HMD. By presenting the targets located at different positionswith respect to the eye of the user, different portions of the retinamay be imaged as the gaze direction of the eye of the user changes toobserve each target image. FIG. 32B shows an example of calibratedretina map stored in the memory of the computing system.

At the decision block 3108, the computing system may determine whetherthe selected portion of the retina image (or the retina image) matcheswith a region of the calibrated retina map. In some implementations, thecomputing system may determine that the selected portion matches with aregion of the calibrated retina map by determining the score generatedat block 3106 is larger than a threshold score. In the example shown inFIG. 32A, the portion of the retina image 3214 may be a match for aregion of the retinal map shown in FIG. 32B (e.g., the region includedin the white rectangle may correspond to the portion of retina image3214 projected on the image sensor 3212).

Upon determining that the selected portion of image matches with aregion in the calibrated retina map, the process proceeds to block 3112.If the computing system determines the selected portion of the imagedoes not match with a region in the calibrated retina map (e.g., bydetermining that the score generated at block 3106 is smaller than athreshold score), the process may proceed to block 3110 and abort theprocess. Subsequently, the process may return to block 3102 where thecomputing system may obtain a new image (e.g., by triggering thecamera).

In some implementations, at block 3108, the computing system may furtherdetermine a gaze direction associated with the retina image using a gazedirection mapping matrix stored in a memory of the computing system. Atblock 3112 the computing system may define a bounding region such as apolygon, e.g., minimal polygon, that contains the retinal pattern (e.g.,region of one or more blood vessels). In some examples, the boundingregion may include all the selected blood vessels. In someimplementations, the bounding region is a polygon with all of itsinternal angles less than 180 degrees. FIG. 32C shows a portion 3314 ofan image projected on the image sensor 3212 that contains blood vessels.In the examples shown, the image of the blood vessels may be a modifiedimage where a high contrast has been generated between the blood vesselsand surrounding tissue. FIG. 32D shows an example bounding region suchas a polygon, e.g., minimal polygon, around the blood vessels identifiedand selected in FIG. 32C.

At block 3114, the computing system may find a center of mass of theminimal polygon or the portion of retina image 3214 included in thebounding region, for example, polygon or minimal polygon.

At block 3116, the computing system may calculate the x-y coordinates ofthe center of mass X and Y (or X₁ and Y₁ defined in FIG. 30 ), forexample, with respect to a coordinate system whose origin is the centerof the image sensor 3212. The x-axis and y-axis may be parallel to theedges of the image sensor 3212. FIG. 32A illustrates a selected portionof a retina image (or a retina image) 3214 projected on the image sensor3212 of the camera. As described above, a center 3216 of the imagesensor 3212 may be defined by the intersection of the optical axis ofthe lens system (e.g., camera lens) that generates the image and theplane of the image sensor.

The computing system may repeat the process 3100 by capturing a secondimage of the retina or second instance of the portion of the retina inthe image produced from a different perspective and calculate the x-ycoordinates of the center of mass X and Y (or X₂ and Y₂ defined in FIG.30 ) of the corresponding binding region (e.g., polygon) or portion ofretina image in the image.

In some other implementations, the computing system may repeat theprocess 3100 by capturing a second retina image using a second camerathat is located at a different position with respect to the user's eye.The position of the second camera may be selected to enable capturingimages of retina from a different perspective compared to the retinaimages captured by the first camera. For example, the second camera canbe a forward-facing camera mounted on the HMD at one side of the firstcamera (e.g., similar to configuration shown in FIG. 30 ). The secondcamera may image the retina through a reflecting optical element e.g., areflecting optical element of the display of the HMD).

As describe above, in some implementations, a single camera may be usedin the process 3100 the is configured to view the retina from twodifferent perspectives. In such implementation, the camera may be aforward-facing camera that captures images of the retina via multiplereflective and/or diffractive elements or a segmented reflective and/ordiffractive elements having multiple segments that introduce differentamounts of tilt or beam steering to provide to provide for differentviews or perspectives of retina. As described above, e.g., with respectto FIGS. 24E, 24F, and 24H, a segmented reflective optical element(e.g., a segmented off-axis mirror or a segmented off-axis holographicmirror) or multiple reflective layers (e.g., multiple off-axis mirrorsor a off-axis holographic mirrors) having different amounts of tilt maygenerate virtual cameras (i.e., virtual images of the single camera), atdifferent angular locations and thereby enable capturing multiplerenderings of retina each associated with a different perspective of theretina. In some examples, different segments of the reflecting opticalelement or different reflective layers may project differentperspectives (or different portions) of the retinal on different regionsof the image sensor of the camera. In these examples, the computingsystem may obtain a first and a second portions of the image by readingthe signals generated by the pixels of the image sensor illuminated by afirst and a second segment of the segmented reflecting optical elementor the first and second reflective layers. Subsequently, the computingsystem may perform the process 3100 twice using the first portion orbounded region and then the second portion or bounded region tocalculate X₁, X₂, Y₁ and Y₂.

In some cases, where the single camera receives a single imageassociated with two different perspectives of retina (e.g., from asegmented reflective and/or diffractive surface or segmented reflectiveand/or diffractive optical element), at block 3104 the computing systemmay find a retinal pattern based at least in part on an overlap regionbetween a first portion of the single image associated with a firstperspective and a second portion of the single image associated with asecond perspective. In some such cases, the computing system may selecttwo identical retinal patterns that are located outside of the overlapregion. (These retinal patterns may be the images of a single pattern ofthe retina of the user's eye captured from different perspectives).

Once the coordinates of the two centers of mass (X₁, X₂, Y₁ and Y₂) arecalculated by repeating the process 3100 twice based on retina images orportions of an image captured show two different views of the retinafrom two different perspectives, the computing system may use equations5-7 and X₁, X₂, Y₁ and Y₂, to calculate the 3D position of the pupilcenter, for example, with respect to a joint coordinate system. In someimplementations, the joint coordinate system (or joint reference frame)may be a coordinate system whose origin is equally distanced from thecenter of the image sensors of the two cameras (or the center of virtualimage sensors of the two virtual cameras generated by segmentedreflecting optical element). The x-axis and y-axis of the coordinatesystem (reference frame) may be parallel to the edges of the imagesensor 3212. For example, in some implementations, the computing systemmay determine the 3D position of the pupil center by calculating L_(x),L_(y), and h based on a first retina image 3014 a and a second retinaimage 3014 b projected on the first image sensor 3011 a and the secondimage sensor 3011 b, and with respect to the xyz reference frame whoseorigin is located at the middle point 3013 between the optical centers3008 a and 3008 b of the two lens systems.

As described above once the 3D position of the pupil center isdetermined, the 3D position of the eyeball center (EBC) may becalculated using the 3D position of the pupil center and the gazedirection associated with the retina images used to calculate the pupilcenter. The gaze direction may be defined using a local coordinatesystem whose origin is at the EBC and one of its axes that (e.g.,z-axis) passes through the pupil center when the orientation of the eyeis associated with a reference gaze direction (e.g., when the user looksstraight through the eyewear, e.g., display or eyepiece, for examplesuch that the optical axis of the eye is perpendicular to the eyepieceor associated layers, such as the waveguides and/or the reflectiveelement, etc.). FIG. 33A illustrates such an x′y′z′ coordinate systemwhere the origin of the x′y′z′ system is located at the EBC (point A)and the z′-axis and is perpendicular to the eyepiece of the HMD. Thez′-axis passes through pupil center B when the eye ball is oriented tolook straight through the eyepiece (i.e., neutral orientation). As shownin FIG. 33B, an arbitrary gaze direction may be defined using the polarit, and azimuthal angles θ with respect to z-axis and x-axis,respectively.

Assuming that EBC position is degenerate under eyeball rotation, at anygiven time t, the 3D coordinate of EBC and the coordinate of the pupilcenter, with respect to the joint coordinate system (e.g., the jointcoordinate system xyz defined in FIG. 30 ), are related by the followingequation:A _((x,y,z,t)) =B _((x,y,z,t))−d(sin_((ϕ(t)))cos_((Θ(t))),sin_((ϕ(t)))sin_((Θ(t))),cos_((ϕ(t))))  (8)where A(x,y,z,t) is a vector pointing to EBC and B(x,y,z,t) is a vectorpointing to pupil center. d is the linear distance between EBC and pupilcenter. In some cases, d may be considered to be constant for a giveneye. In some implementations, the computing system of the HMD maydetermine the value of d for a user of the HMD such as during acalibration process. As such by knowing the 3D location of the pupilcenter and the gaze direction (ϕ and θ) at which the pupil center hasbeen determined, the 3D location of the EBC can be calculated. FIG. 33Cshows the relative position of the pupil center (B) with respect to EBC(A) for three different gaze directions. The orientation of the eyeballin the middle diagram is a neutral orientation and is associated with areference gaze direction (ϕ=θ=0) where the eye is looking along thedirection of the z-axis (e.g., directly forward and/or normal to theeyepiece).

Given that the position of the EBC may change under eyeball rotation(e.g., with respect to a reference frame of the HMD, in someimplementations, the computing system of the HMD may determine the 3Dlocation of the EBC by averaging the variation of the right hand side ofthe equation 8 over time (as the gaze direction and therefore B change):A _((x,y,z,t)) =<B _((x,y,z))−d(sin_((ϕ(t)))cos_((Θ(t))),sin_((ϕ(t)))sin_((Θ(t))),cos_((ϕ(t))))>t  (9)

An error in the determined 3D position of the EBC may be reduced byincreasing the averaging time.

The gaze direction (ϕ and θ) associated with a pupil center location maybe calculated based on the one or more retina images used to calculatethe pupil center. As mentioned above, during the calibration process agaze direction mapping matrix may be generated that maps different gazedirections to different retina images captured by a camera from aspecific perspective. FIGS. 13A and 13B, for example, shows how aretinal map may be created by presenting the user with different targetsduring a calibration process and how the user's gaze can subsequently bedetermine base on the retinal image obtained and how that retinal imagefits within the retinal map.

FIG. 34 is a flow diagram showing an example of a method that may beused by a computing system of the HMD, for example during thecalibration process to generate a gaze direction mapping matrix. Thecomputing system may initially present multiple targets approximatelylocated in front of the eye of the user and ask the user (e.g., via auser interface of the HMD) to select a virtual target that isapproximately at the center of the user's view when the user looksstraight through the eyepiece. When such target is selected by the user,that virtual target may be labeled as a reference virtual target that isassociated with a reference gaze direction (e.g., gaze direction definedby ϕ=θ=0). Using the reference target, the computing system maydetermine a series of targets associated with different gaze directionswith respect to the reference gaze direction. These targets may be usedduring the process 3400 to generate the gaze direction mapping matrix.As a result, the different virtual targets can be uniquely associatedwith specific values of (ϕ and θ).

The process 3400 begins at block 3402 where the computing systempresents a first virtual target to the user via the waveguide display ofthe HMD and asks the user to look at the target. In someimplementations, the first virtual target may be a reference targetdetermined before the process 3400 begins.

At block 3404, the computing system may capture an image of a portion ofthe retina of the eye of the user using one or more cameras. The portionof retinal captured is determined by the gaze direction associated withthe target (determined before the process begins). In someimplementations, no initial target is presented. Rather the user issimply requested to look directly forward and a retinal image isobtained and associated with the reference (e.g., straight forward) gazedirection.

At block 3406, the computing system may store the retina image capturedat block 3404 along with the corresponding gaze direction (i.e., valuesof ϕ and θ associated with the target presented at block 3402).

At the decision block 3408, the computing system determined whether theacquired image and previously acquired images are sufficient to generatea gaze direction mapping matrix. In some examples, the computing systemmay determine that the acquired images are sufficient by checking thegaze directions associated with the targets presented to the user. Ifthe computing systems determines that the images associated with thevarious gaze directions have been captured, the process proceeds toblock 3410, otherwise the process returns to block 3402 to capture moreimages using different targets.

The process from block 3402 to block 3408 may be repeated until retinaimages associated with the gaze angles are captured.

At block 3410, the computing system may generate the gaze directionmapping matrix using the retina images captured and the correspondinggaze angles (ϕ and θ).

In some implementations, for different targets (and different gazeangles) multiple images may be captures using multiple cameras ormultiple virtual cameras. In these implementations, the resulting gazedirection mapping matrix may be used to determine gaze directions basedon multiple images captured using multiple cameras or multiple portionsof the image corresponding to the same portion of the retina.Advantageously determining the gaze direction based on multiple camerasand/or multiple perspectives may improve the accuracy of the determinedgaze direction.

In some implementations, during the process 3400 (performed during acalibration stage), the computing system may also estimate the value ofd (i.e., the linear distance between the pupil center and the EBC) forthe user of the HMD. In such implementations, at block 3404, two cameras(or two virtual cameras associated with a single camera) may be used tocapture two images of the retinal of the user's eye from two differentperspectives. The computing systems may use the corresponding imagepairs to calculate the 3D position of the pupil center (B vector) at thedifferent gaze direction (associated with respective targets). Thecomputing system may use the method described above to calculate aplurality of 3D positions of the pupil centers. Subsequently, thecomputing system may use the plurality of 3D positions of the pupilcenter (plurality of B vectors) and the associated plurality of gazedirections (plurality of ϕ and θ values) to estimate d. For example, thecomputing system may calculate a plurality of 3D EBC positions(plurality of A vectors) using, equation 8, the plurality of B vectorsand the plurality of ϕ and θ values, as it varies the value of d.Through this process, the computing system may determine what value of dresults in the smallest possible variation of A vector (3D EBC position)as the location of the pupil center (and the associated gaze direction)change. Such value of d may be stored in a memory of the computingsystem and may be used for subsequent determination of the EBC based onthe methods described above. Other methods of determining d may beemployed. As discussed above, with the retinal camera calibrated suchthat gaze direction can be determined and a value for d is established,the EBC can be calculated based on measurements of the pupil position.With the pupil position and the gaze direction known, the EBC isdetermined by translating back along the gaze direction from the pupilposition a distance, d. The EBC is located as this position.

A wide range of variations are possible. For example, although thecamera shown as forward facing in many of the figures, the method is notlimited to forward facing cameras that employ off-axis mirrors.Similarly, although VCSEL's have been discussed as above as a desirablesource of illumination, light sources different than VCSEL's, includingother solid state light source, can be employed. Additionally, althoughthe location of the center of mass or centroid is discussed measuredwith respect to the center of the image sensor at the image plane of theimage sensor, other reference locations may be employed. Similarly,other reference frames and reference coordinate systems may be used.Also, other positions besides the center of mass or centroid maypotentially be used with appropriate adjustments. Additionally, thereflecting and/or diffractive optical element (e.g. off-axis reflectoror mirror) discussed herein that may be used to reflect light from theeye (e.g., retina) to the camera may comprise a reflective and/ordiffractive optical surface in some implementations.

Computer Vision to Detect Objects in an Image

As discussed above, the display system may be configured to detectobjects in or properties of an image. The detection may be accomplishedusing a variety of techniques, including various sensors (e.g., cameras,audio sensors, temperature sensors, etc.), as discussed herein.

In some embodiments, objects present may be detected using computervision techniques. For example, as disclosed herein, the displaysystem's camera may be configured to image the user's eye and thedisplay system may be configured to perform image analysis on the imagesto determine the presence of objects. The display system may analyze theimages acquired by the imaging system to perform object recognition,learning, indexing, motion estimation, or image restoration, etc. Asother examples, the display system may be configured to perform faceand/or eye recognition to determine the presence and location of facesand/or human eyes in the user's field of view. One or more computervision algorithms may be used to perform these tasks. Non-limitingexamples of computer vision algorithms include: Scale-invariant featuretransform (SIFT), speeded up robust features (SURF), oriented FAST androtated BRIEF (ORB), binary robust invariant scalable keypoints (BRISK),fast retina keypoint (FREAK), Viola-Jones algorithm, Eigenfacesapproach, Lucas-Kanade algorithm, Horn-Schunk algorithm, Mean-shiftalgorithm, visual simultaneous location and mapping (vSLAM) techniques,a sequential Bayesian estimator (e.g., Kalman filter, extended Kalmanfilter, etc.), bundle adjustment, Adaptive thresholding (and otherthresholding techniques), Iterative Closest Point (ICP), Semi GlobalMatching (SGM), Semi Global Block Matching (SGBM), Feature PointHistograms, various machine learning algorithms (such as e.g., supportvector machine, k-nearest neighbors algorithm, Naive Bayes, neuralnetwork (including convolutional or deep neural networks), or othersupervised/unsupervised models, etc.), and so forth.

One or more of these computer vision techniques may also be usedtogether with data acquired from other sensors (such as, e.g.,microphone) to detect and determine various properties of the objectsdetected by the sensors.

As discussed herein, the objects may be detected based on one or morecriteria. When the display system detects the presence or absence of thecriteria for example in an image using a computer vision algorithm orusing data received from one or more sensor assemblies (which may or maynot be part of the display system), the display system may then signalthe presence of the object.

Machine Learning

A variety of machine learning algorithms may be used to learn toidentify the presence of objects in an image. Once trained, the machinelearning algorithms may be stored by the display system. Some examplesof machine learning algorithms may include supervised or non-supervisedmachine learning algorithms, including regression algorithms (such as,for example, Ordinary Least Squares Regression), instance-basedalgorithms (such as, for example, Learning Vector Quantization),decision tree algorithms (such as, for example, classification andregression trees), Bayesian algorithms (such as, for example, NaiveBayes), clustering algorithms (such as, for example, k-meansclustering), association rule learning algorithms (such as, for example,a-priori algorithms), artificial neural network algorithms (such as, forexample, Perceptron), deep learning algorithms (such as, for example,Deep Boltzmann Machine, or deep neural network), dimensionalityreduction algorithms (such as, for example, Principal ComponentAnalysis), ensemble algorithms (such as, for example, StackedGeneralization), and/or other machine learning algorithms. In someembodiments, individual models may be customized for individual datasets. For example, the wearable device may generate or store a basemodel. The base model may be used as a starting point to generateadditional models specific to a data type (e.g., a particular user), adata set (e.g., a set of additional images obtained), conditionalsituations, or other variations. In some embodiments, the display systemmay be configured to utilize a plurality of techniques to generatemodels for analysis of the aggregated data. Other techniques may includeusing pre-defined thresholds or data values.

The criteria for detecting an object may include one or more thresholdconditions. If the analysis of the data acquired by the image sensorindicates that a threshold condition is passed, the display system mayprovide a signal indicating the detection the presence of the object inthe image. The threshold condition may involve a quantitative and/orqualitative measure. For example, the threshold condition may include ascore or a percentage associated with the likelihood of the reflectionand/or object being present in the image. The display system may comparethe score calculated from the sensor's data with the threshold score. Ifthe score is higher than the threshold level, the display system maydetect the presence of the reflection and/or object. In some otherembodiments, the display system may signal the presence of the object inan image if the score is lower than the threshold. In some embodiments,the threshold condition may be determined based on the user's emotionalstate and/or the user's interactions with the ambient environment.

In some embodiments, the threshold conditions, the machine learningalgorithms, or the computer vision algorithms may be specialized for aspecific context. For example, in a diagnostic context, the computervision algorithm may be specialized to detect certain responses to thestimulus. As another example, the display system may execute facialrecognition algorithms and/or event tracing algorithms to sense theuser's reaction to a stimulus, as discussed herein.

In various implementations, the display system (HMD) may comprise acomputing system, e.g., electronics or processing electronics, incommunication with one or more cameras used to captures images (e.g.,images of the retina of a user of the HMD). The computing system maycomprise a memory and an electronic processor configured to executemachine readable instructions stored in the memory. The computing systemmay be connected to the image sensors of the one of more cameras andreceive image data (e.g., digital image data) from the image sensors. Insome cases, the computing system may be configured to trigger the cameraand/or one or more light sources to project one or more images on one ormore image sensors and cause the one or more cameras to capture one ormore images. Subsequently, the computing system may receive thecorresponding image data from the one or more image sensors. One or moreimage processing algorithms may be stored in the memory of the computingsystem to modify the image data and extract information related tovarious aspects of the image data (e.g., position of a specific patternon the image sensor). In some examples, the computing system and theimage sensors may be configured to enable the computing system toreceive image data from a selected sub-set of pixels of each imagesensor.

EXAMPLES

Some nonlimiting examples of embodiments described herein are offeredbelow merely by way of illustration.

Section I

Example 1: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field;    -   a reflective element disposed on the frame, at least a portion        of said eyepiece and said reflective element being transparent        to visible light and disposed at a location in front of the        user's eye when the user wears said head-mounted display such        that said transparent portions transmit light from an        environment in front of the user to the user's eye to provide a        view of the environment in front of the user; and    -   at least one VCSEL disposed to illuminate said eye,    -   wherein said camera is disposed with respect to said reflective        element such that light from said VCSEL is reflected from the        user's eye to said reflective element and is reflected from said        reflective element to said camera to form images of said eye        that are captured by said camera.

Example 2: The system of Example 1, wherein said at least one VCSELcomprises an IR light source that outputs more infrared light thanvisible light.

Example 3: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one VCSEL comprises a plurality of VCSELs.

Example 4: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one VCSEL is mounted temporally on said frame on a temporal sideof said user's head when worn by the user.

Example 5: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one VCSEL is mounted on a layer on said eyepiece.

Example 6: The system of any of Examples 1-4, wherein said at least oneVCSEL is mounted on a layer in front of the user's eye such that whenthe user wears said head-mounted display said layer transmits light froman environment in front of the user to the user's eye to provide a viewof the environment in front of the user.

Example 7: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said VCSELis configured to output polarized light.

Example 8: The system of any of the examples above, further comprising apolarizer disposed between said VCSEL and said user's eye.

Example 9: The system of any of the examples above, further comprising apolarizer on said VCSEL.

Example 10: The system of any of the examples above, further comprisingelectronics configured to modulate said VCSEL to reduce speckle.

Example 11: The system of any of the claims above, wherein said at leastone VCSEL is integrated with the camera.

Example 12: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame 7

Example 13: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 14: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 15: The system of any of the examples above, further comprisingelectronics configured to modulate said VCSEL.

Example 16: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 17: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 18: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 19: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 20: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Example 21: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises a diffractive optical element or aholographic optical element.

Example 22: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises an off axis mirror.

Example 23: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field, at least a portion of        said eyepiece being transparent to visible light and disposed at        a location in front of the user's eye when the user wears said        head-mounted display such that said transparent portions        transmit light from an environment in front of the user to the        user's eye to provide a view of the environment in front of the        user; and    -   at least one VCSEL disposed to illuminate said eye,    -   wherein said camera is disposed such that light from said VCSEL        is reflected from the user's eye to said camera to form images        of said eye that are captured by said camera.

Example 24: The system of Example 23, wherein said at least one VCSELcomprises an IR light source that outputs more infrared light thanvisible light.

Example 25: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one VCSEL comprises a plurality of VCSELs.

Example 26: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one VCSEL is mounted temporally on said frame on a temporal sideof said user's head when worn by the user.

Example 27: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one VCSEL is mounted on a layer on said eyepiece.

Example 28: The system of any of Examples 23-26, wherein said at leastone VCSEL is mounted on a layer in front of the user's eye such thatwhen the user wears said head-mounted display said layer transmits lightfrom an environment in front of the user to the user's eye to provide aview of the environment in front of the user.

Example 29: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said VCSELis configured to output polarized light.

Example 30: The system of any of the examples above, further comprisinga polarizer disposed between said VCSEL and said user's eye.

Example 31: The system of any of the examples above, further comprisinga polarizer on said VCSEL.

Example 32: The system of any of the examples above, further comprisingelectronics configured to modulate said VCSEL to reduce speckle.

Example 33: The system of any of the claims above, wherein said at leastone VCSEL is integrated with the camera.

Example 34: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame.

Example 35: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 36: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 27: The system of any of the examples above, further comprisingelectronics configured to modulate said VCSEL.

Example 38: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 39: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 40: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 41: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 42: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Example 43: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one VCSEL is mounted on a temporal side of the center of theuser's eye when worn by the user.

Example 44: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one VCSEL is mounted on said frame on a temporal side of thecenter of the user's eye when worn by the user.

Section II

Example 1: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field,    -   a reflective element disposed on the frame, at least a portion        of said eyepiece and said reflective element being transparent        to visible light and disposed at a location in front of the        user's eye when the user wears said head-mounted display such        that said transparent portions transmit light from an        environment in front of the user to the user's eye to provide a        view of the environment in front of the user, said reflective        element having chromatic aberration; and    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye,    -   at least one diffractive optical element having chromatic        dispersion that counters at least a portion of the chromatic        aberration introduced by said reflective element,    -   wherein said camera is disposed with respect to said reflective        element such that light from said at least one light source is        reflected from the user's eye to said reflective element and is        reflected from said reflective element to said camera to form        images of said eye that are captured by said camera.

Example 2: The system of Example 1, wherein said at least one lightsource comprises in infrared light source configured to provide moreinfrared light than visible light.

Example 3: The system of any of the examples above, further comprising afocusing optical element disposed within an optical path between thediffractive optical element and the reflective element.

Example 4: The system of the examples above, wherein the diffractiveoptical element is a diffractive optical element configured to reflectthe light into the camera.

Example 5: The system of the examples above, wherein the diffractiveoptical element is a reflective diffractive optical element configuredto pass the light therethrough into the camera.

Example 6: The system of the examples above, further comprising apartially reflective optical element configured to transmit the lighttherethrough and to reflect light from the light source toward thediffractive optical element.

Example 7: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame.

Example 8: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 9: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 10: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 11: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a VCSEL.

Example 12: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 13: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 14: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 15: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 16: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Example 17: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises a diffractive optical element or aholographic optical element.

Example 18: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises an off axis mirror.

Section III

Example 1: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field,    -   a reflective element disposed on the frame, at least a portion        of said eyepiece and said reflective element being transparent        to visible light and disposed at a location in front of the        user's eye when the user wears said head-mounted display such        that said transparent portions transmit light from an        environment in front of the user to the user's eye to provide a        view of the environment in front of the user; and    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye, said        at least one light source mounted on a layer in front of the        user's eye such that when the user wears said head-mounted        display said layer transmits light from an environment in front        of the user to the user's eye to provide a view of the        environment in front of the user,    -   wherein said camera is disposed with respect to said reflective        element such that light from said at least one light source is        reflected from the user's eye to said reflective element and is        reflected from said reflective element to said camera to form        images of said eye that are captured by said camera.

Example 2: The system of Example 1, wherein said layer is part of saideyepiece.

Example 3: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame.

Example 4: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 5: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 6: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 7: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a VCSEL.

Example 8: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 9: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 10: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 11: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 12: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Example 13: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises a diffractive optical element or aholographic optical element.

Example 14: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises an off axis mirror.

Example 15: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field, at least a portion of        said eyepiece being transparent to visible light and disposed at        a location in front of the user's eye when the user wears said        head-mounted display such that said transparent portions        transmit light from an environment in front of the user to the        user's eye to provide a view of the environment in front of the        user; and    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye, said        at least one light source mounted on a layer in front of the        user's eye such that when the user wears said head-mounted        display said layer transmits light from an environment in front        of the user to the user's eye to provide a view of the        environment in front of the user,    -   wherein said camera is disposed such that light from said at        least one light source is reflected from the user's eye to said        camera to form images of said eye that are captured by said        camera.

Example 16: The system of Example 15, wherein said layer is part of saideyepiece.

Example 17: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame.

Example 18: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 19: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 20: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 21: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a VCSEL.

Example 22: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 23: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 24: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 25: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 26: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Section IV

Example 1: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field,    -   a reflective element disposed on the frame, at least a portion        of said eyepiece and said reflective element being transparent        to visible light and disposed at a location in front of the        user's eye when the user wears said head-mounted display such        that said transparent portions transmit light from an        environment in front of the user to the user's eye to provide a        view of the environment in front of the user; and    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye, said        light source disposed on said eyepiece,    -   wherein said camera is disposed with respect to said reflective        element such that light from said at least one light source is        reflected from the user's eye to said reflective element and is        reflected from said reflective element to said camera to form        images of said eye that are captured by said camera.

Example 2: The system of Example 1, wherein said at least one lightsource comprises a VCSEL.

Example 3: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame.

Example 4: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 5: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 6: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 7: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 8: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 9: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 10: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 11: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Example 12: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises a diffractive optical element or aholographic optical element.

Example 13: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises an off axis mirror.

Example 14: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field, at least a portion of        said eyepiece being transparent to visible light and disposed at        a location in front of the user's eye when the user wears said        head-mounted display such that said transparent portions        transmit light from an environment in front of the user to the        user's eye to provide a view of the environment in front of the        user; and    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye, said        light source disposed on said eyepiece,    -   wherein said camera is disposed that light from said at least        one light source is reflected from the user's eye to said camera        to form images of said eye that are captured by said camera.

Example 15: The system of Example 14, wherein said at least one lightsource comprises a VCSEL19

Example 16: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame.

Example 17: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 18: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 19: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 20: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 21: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 22: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 23: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 24: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Section V

Example 1: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field,    -   a reflective element disposed on the frame, at least a portion        of said eyepiece and said reflective element being transparent        to visible light and disposed at a location in front of the        user's eye when the user wears said head-mounted display such        that said transparent portions transmit light from an        environment in front of the user to the user's eye to provide a        view of the environment in front of the user;    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye; and    -   at least one lens disposed between the reflective optical        element and the camera, the reflective element and the eye, or        both,    -   wherein said camera is disposed with respect to said reflective        element such that light from said at least one light source is        reflected from the user's eye to said reflective element and is        reflected from said reflective element to said camera to form        images of said eye that are captured by said camera.

Example 2: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one lens is disposed between the reflective optical element andthe camera.

Example 3: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one lens is disposed between the reflective element and the eye.

Example 4: The system of any of the examples aims above, wherein said atleast one lens is disposed between the reflective optical element andthe camera and said at least one lens is disposed between the reflectiveelement and the eye.

Example 5: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said atleast one lens increases the camera's field of view of the eye.

Example 6: The system of any of the examples above, wherein the cameracomprises detector array and at least one imaging lens in addition tosaid at least one lens.

Example 7: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises a diffractive optical element or aholographic optical element.

Example 8: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises an off axis mirror.

Example 9: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame.

Example 10: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 11: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 12: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 13: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a VCSEL.

Example 14: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 15: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 16: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 17: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 18: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Section VI

Example 1: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field,    -   a reflective element disposed on the frame, at least a portion        of said eyepiece and said reflective element being transparent        to visible light and disposed at a location in front of the        user's eye when the user wears said head-mounted display such        that said transparent portions transmit light from an        environment in front of the user to the user's eye to provide a        view of the environment in front of the user; and    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye, said        illumination configured to be polarized when incident on said        eye,    -   wherein said camera is disposed with respect to said reflective        element such that light from said at least one light source is        reflected from the user's eye to said reflective element and is        reflected from said reflective element to said camera to form        images of said eye that are captured by said camera, said camera        configured to be polarization selective and to receive more        light of one polarization than another polarization such that        glare from said cornea is reduced.

Example 2: The system of any of the claims above, further comprising apolarizer disposed in an optical path between said light source and saiduser's eye.

Example 3: The system of any of the claims above, wherein said lightsource is configured to output polarized light.

Example 4: The system of any of the claims above, wherein a polarizer isdisposed on said light source.

Example 5: The system of any of the claims above, further comprising apolarizer disposed between said eye and said camera.

Example 6: The system of any of the claims above, wherein the cameraincludes a polarizer.

Example 7: The system of any of the claims above, wherein thepolarization output by said light source is attenuated prior to reachingsaid camera more than other polarization states.

Example 7: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises a diffractive optical element or aholographic optical element.

Example 8: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises an off axis mirror.

Example 9: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame.

Example 10: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 11: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 12: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 13: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a VCSEL.

Example 14: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 15: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 16: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 17: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 18: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Example 19: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field, at least a portion of        said eyepiece being transparent to visible light and disposed at        a location in front of the user's eye when the user wears said        head-mounted display such that said transparent portions        transmit light from an environment in front of the user to the        user's eye to provide a view of the environment in front of the        user; and    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye, said        illumination configured to be polarized when incident on said        eye; and    -   a polarization selective optical element disposed to receive        light reflected from the eye;    -   wherein said camera is disposed such that light from said at        least one light source is reflected from the user's eye to said        camera to form images of said eye that are captured by said        camera, said polarization selective optical element disposed        such that said camera receives more light of one polarization        than another polarization such that glare from said cornea is        reduced.

Example 20: The system of any of the examples above, further comprisinga polarizer disposed in an optical path between said light source andsaid user's eye.

Example 21: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said lightsource is configured to output polarized light.

Example 22: The system of any of the examples above, wherein a polarizeris disposed on said light source.

Example 23: The system of any of the examples above, wherein the cameraincludes said polarization selective optical element.

Example 24: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saidpolarization selective optical element comprises a polarizer disposedbetween said eye and said camera.

Example 25: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thepolarization output by said light source is attenuated prior to reachingsaid camera more than other polarization states.

Example 26: The system of any of the examples above, said illuminationis configured to be linear polarized when incident on said eye.

Example 27: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame.

Example 28: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 29: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 30: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 31: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a VCSEL.

Example 32: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 33: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 34: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 35: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 36: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Section VII

Example 1: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   a camera;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field,    -   at least first and second reflective elements disposed on the        frame, at least a portion of said eyepiece and said first and        second reflective elements being transparent to visible light        and disposed at a location in front of the user's eye when the        user wears said head-mounted display such that said transparent        portions transmit light from an environment in front of the user        to the user's eye to provide a view of the environment in front        of the user; and    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye,    -   wherein said camera is disposed with respect to said first and        second reflective elements such that light from said at least        one light source is reflected from the user's eye to said first        and second reflective elements and is reflected from said first        and second reflective elements to said camera to form images of        said eye that are captured by said camera.

Example 2: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstreflective element and said second reflective element are configured toreflect light at different angles from each other.

Example 3: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstreflective element and said second reflective element comprisediffractive optical elements or holographic optical elements withdifferent amounts of tilt.

Example 4: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstreflective element and said second reflective element comprisediffractive optical elements or holographic optical elements withdifferent amounts of tilt programed into the diffractive optical elementor holographic optical element.

Example 5: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said secondreflective element is more forward than said first reflective elementand thus farther from said eye than said first reflective element.

Example 6: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saidreflective element comprises a diffractive optical element or aholographic optical element.

Example 7: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to receive light from said image projector and todirect said light into said user's eye to display augmented realityimage content to the user's vision field.

Example 8: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises said at least one waveguide.

Example 9: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saidreflective element is disposed on said eyepiece.

Example 10: The system of any of the examples above, wherein reflectiveelement is part of said eyepiece.

Example 11: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstreflective element is more reflective of light at a first wavelengththan a second wavelength and said second reflective element being morereflective of light at said second wavelength than said firstwavelength.

Example 12: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second reflective elements are configured to collect light fromdifferent directions and direct said light to said camera.

Example 13: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second reflective elements are configured to collect light fromdifferent portions of said retina and direct said light to said camera.

Example 14: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second reflective elements provide different perspectives of saidretina to camera.

Example 15: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second reflective elements provide different views of said retina tocamera.

Example 16: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises an off axis mirror.

Example 17: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame.

Example 18: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed on said frame temporally with respect to the centerof the user's eye.

Example 19: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said acamera is disposed temporally on said frame such that said camera is ona temporal side of the user's head.

Example 20: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 21: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a VCSEL.

Example 22: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 23: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 24: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 25: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 26: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Section VIII

Example 1: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   first and second cameras;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field;    -   a reflective element disposed on the frame, at least a portion        of said eyepiece and said reflective element being transparent        to visible light and disposed at a location in front of the        user's eye when the user wears said head-mounted display such        that said transparent portions transmit light from an        environment in front of the user to the user's eye to provide a        view of the environment in front of the user; and    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye,    -   wherein said first and second cameras are disposed with respect        to said reflective element such that light from said        illumination source is reflected from the user's eye to said        reflective element and is reflected from said reflective element        to said first and second cameras to form images of said eye that        are captured by said first and second cameras.

Example 2: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras are disposed laterally with respect to each other.

Example 3: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras are disposed side-by-side.

Example 4: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras provide different perspectives of said retina.

Example 5: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras provide different views of said retina.

Example 6: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras together provide an increased field of view of saidretina.

Example 7: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras are disposed on said frame.

Example 8: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras is disposed on said frame temporally with respect tothe center of the user's eye.

Example 9: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras are disposed temporally on said frame such that saidcamera is on a temporal side of the user's head.

Example 10: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises a diffractive optical element or aholographic optical element.

Example 11: The system of any of the examples above, wherein thereflective optical element comprises an off axis mirror.

Example 12: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 13: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a VCSEL.

Example 14: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 15: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 16: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 17: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 18: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Example 19: A head mounted display system configured to project light toan eye of a user to display augmented reality image content in a visionfield of said user, said head-mounted display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   an image projector configured to project images into the user's        eye to display image content in the vision field of the user;    -   first and second cameras;    -   an eyepiece disposed on the frame, said eyepiece configured to        direct light into said user's eye to display augmented reality        image content to the user's vision field, at least a portion of        said eyepiece being transparent to visible light and disposed at        a location in front of the user's eye when the user wears said        head-mounted display such that said transparent portions        transmit light from an environment in front of the user to the        user's eye to provide a view of the environment in front of the        user; and    -   at least one light source disposed to illuminate said eye,    -   wherein said first and second cameras are disposed such that        light from said illumination source is reflected from the user's        eye to said first and second cameras to form images of said eye        that are captured by said first and second cameras.

Example 20: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras are disposed laterally with respect to each other.

Example 21: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras are disposed side-by-side.

Example 22: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras provide different perspectives of said retina.

Example 23: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras provide different views of said retina.

Example 24: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras together provide an increased field of view of saidretina.

Example 25: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras are disposed on said frame.

Example 26: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras is disposed on said frame temporally with respect tothe center of the user's eye.

Example 27: The system of any of the examples above, wherein said firstand second cameras are disposed temporally on said frame such that saidcamera is on a temporal side of the user's head.

Example 28: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a laser.

Example 29: The system of the examples above, wherein said light sourcecomprises a VCSEL.

Example 30: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field such that the displayedvirtual image content appears to originate from different depths.

Example 31: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye to displayvirtual image content to the user's vision field at different amounts ofat least one of divergence such that the displayed virtual image contentappears to originate from different depths.

Example 32: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece is configured to project light into said user's eye thatdivergences and to project light into said user's eye that is collimatedto display virtual image content to the user's vision field that appearsto originate from different depths.

Example 33: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides.

Example 34: The system of any of the examples above, wherein saideyepiece comprises one or more waveguides configured to direct lightfrom said image projector to said user's eye to present image content tothe user.

Section IX

Example 1: A display system configured to project light to an eye of auser to display virtual image content in a vision field of said user,said eye having a retina and a pupil, said display system comprising:

-   -   a frame configured to be supported on a head of the user;    -   a head-mounted display disposed on the frame, said display        configured to project light into said user's eye to display        virtual image content to the user's vision field;    -   at least one light source configured to direct light into said        retina;        -   one or more cameras configured to image the user's retina,            said camera comprising an image sensor and a camera lens;            and    -   processing electronics in communication with the display and the        one or more cameras, the processing electronics configured to:        -   receive one or more images of the user's retina captured by            the one or more cameras; and    -   estimate a location of a first feature of said eye based on one        or more images produced by said one or more cameras.

Example 2: The display system of Example 1, wherein said location ofsaid first feature of said eye comprises a location in 3D space.

Example 3: The display system of Example 1 or 2, wherein said locationof said first feature of said eye is not a feature of said retina.

Example 4: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinprocessing electronics is further configured to estimate a location of asecond feature of said eye based on said location of said first featureof said eye.

Example 5: The display system of Example 4, wherein said location ofsaid second feature of said eye comprises a location in 3D space.

Example 6: The display system of any of Example 4 or 5, wherein saidlocation of said second feature of said eye is not a feature of saidretina.

Example 7: The display system of any of Examples 4-6, wherein saidlocation of said second feature of said eye is estimated based on a gazedirection of said eye.

Example 8: The display system of any of Examples 4-7, wherein saidlocation of said second feature of said eye is estimated by translatinga distance along a gaze direction of said eye from said location of saidfirst feature of said eye to the location of said second feature of saideye.

Example 9: The display system of Example 8, wherein said processingelectronics is configured to estimate said distance based on a pluralityof measurements of gaze direction.

Example 10: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid processing electronics is configured to determine gaze direction ofsaid user's eye based on an image of said retina obtained by said one ormore cameras.

Example 11: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid processing electronics is configured to determine gaze direction ofsaid user's eye based on assessing where at least part of an image ofsaid retina obtained by said camera fits within a retinal map.

Example 12: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid processing electronics is configured to produce a retinal map basedon a plurality of retinal images obtained for different user eye gazes.

Example 13: The display system of any of the examples above, wherein aretinal map is produced in part by displaying a plurality of targets tosaid user's eye, said targets located at different positions, to therebycause said user's eye to alter gaze direction, said different gazedirections correlated to images obtained of said retina by said one ormore cameras at said respective gaze directions.

Example 14: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid processing electronics is configured to produce a gaze matrix basedon correlating images of said user's retina with gaze directions of saiduser's eye.

Example 15: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature is estimated based on at least firstand second images of said retina captured by said one or more cameras,said first and second images of said retina obtain from differentperspectives.

Example 16: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid one or more cameras comprise first and second cameras and saidlocation of said first feature of said eye is estimated based on atleast first and second images of said retina captured by said first andsecond cameras, respectively.

Example 17: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid one or more cameras comprise first and second cameras and saidlocation of said first feature of said eye is estimated based on aplurality of first and second images of said retina captured by saidfirst and second cameras, respectively.

Example 18: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature of said eye is estimated based onthe determination of the location of features of said retina projectedonto said image sensor.

Example 19: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature is estimated based on thedetermination of the location of blood vessels of said retina projectedonto said image sensor.

Example 20: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature of said eye is estimated based onthe determination of the location of features of said retina projectedonto said image sensor relative to a reference location on said imagesensor.

Example 21: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature of said eye is estimated based onthe determination of the location of blood vessels of said retinaprojected onto said image sensor relative to a reference location onsaid image sensor.

Example 22: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature of said eye is estimated based onthe determination of the location of a spot in an image captured by saidcamera formed by light from the at least one light source reflected fromsaid retina and projected onto said image sensor.

Example 23: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature of said eye is estimated based onthe determination of the location of a spot in an image captured by saidcamera formed by light from the at least one light source reflected fromsaid retina and projected onto said image sensor relative to a referenceon said images sensor.

Example 24: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid processing electronics is configured to determine the center ofmass or centroid of a spot in an image captured by said one or morecameras that is formed by light from the at least one light source thatis reflected from said retina and projected onto said image sensor.

Example 25: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid one or more cameras comprise first and second cameras and saidlocation of said first feature of said eye is estimated based on acomparison of the location of spots in first and second image capturedby said first and second cameras, respectively, said spots formed bylight reflected from the at least one light source reflected from saidretina and projected onto said image sensor.

Example 26: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature of said eye is estimated based onthe determination of the location of a plurality of spots in an imagecaptured by said one or more cameras formed by light from said at leastone light source reflected from said retina and projected onto saidimage sensor.

Example 27: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature of said eye is estimated based on acomparison of the location of a plurality of spots in an image capturedby said one or more cameras, said spots formed by light reflected fromsaid at least one light source reflected from said retina and projectedonto said image sensor.

Example 28: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid processing electronics is configured to determine a plurality ofcenters of mass or centroids of a plurality of respective spots in animage captured by said one or more cameras formed by light from said atleast one light source reflected from said retina and projected ontosaid image sensor.

Example 29: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid processing electronics is configured to determine a plurality ofcenters of mass or centroids of a plurality of respective spots in animage captured by said one or more cameras formed by light from said atleast one illumination source reflected from said retina and projectedonto said image sensor relative to a reference on said image sensor.

Example 30: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid processing electronics is configured to determine said location ofsaid first feature of said eye using triangulation.

Example 31: The display system of any of the examples above, furthercomprising a segmented optical element configured to provide differentperspectives of said retina to said one or more cameras.

Example 32: The display system of Example 31, wherein said segmentedoptical element comprises a reflective optical element that is segmentedto provide different perspectives of said retina to said one or morecameras.

Example 33: The display system of any of the Examples 31 or 32, whereinsaid segmented optical element comprises a segmented diffractive orholographic optical element.

Example 34: The display system of any of the Examples 31-33, whereinsaid segmented optical element comprises different segments configuredto collect light from different directions and direct said light to saidone or more cameras.

Example 35: The display system of any of the examples above, furthercomprising a plurality of optical elements configured to providedifferent perspectives of said retina to said one or more cameras.

Example 36: The display system of Example 35 above, wherein saidplurality of optical elements configured to provide differentperspectives of said retina to said one or more cameras comprise aplurality of reflective optical elements.

Example 37: The display system of any of Examples 35 or 36, wherein saidplurality of optical elements comprises diffractive or holographicoptical elements.

Example 38: The display system of any of Examples 35-37, whereinrespective ones of said plurality of optical elements are configured tocollect light from different respective directions and direct said lightto said at least one camera.

Example 39: The display system of any of Examples 35-38, wherein saidplurality of optical elements configured to provide differentperspectives of said retina to said one or more cameras comprises aplurality of diffractive or holographic optical elements.

Example 40: The display system of any of Examples 35-39, wherein saidplurality of optical elements configured to provide differentperspectives of said retina to said one or more cameras comprises aplurality of reflective diffractive or holographic optical elements.

Example 41: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid processor is configured to determine said location of said firstfeature of said eye based on multiple images of said retina captured fordifferent gaze directions.

Example 42: The display system of any of Examples 1-16, 18-24, and26-41, wherein said at least one camera comprises a single camera.

Example 43: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature comprises the location of the saidpupil.

Example 44: The display system of any of the examples above, whereinsaid location of said first feature comprises the location of the centerof said pupil.

Example 45: The display system of any of Examples 4-44, wherein saidlocation of said second feature comprises the location of the eyeballcenter or center of rotation of the eye.

Example 46: A method of determining a characteristic of the eye in adisplay system configured to project light to an eye of a user todisplay virtual image content in a vision field of said user, said eyehaving a retina and a pupil, said display system comprising a frameconfigured to be supported on a head of the user, a head-mounted displaydisposed on the frame, said display configured to project light intosaid user's eye to display virtual image content to the user's visionfield, at least one light source and one or more cameras, said methodcomprising:

-   -   directing light form said light source into said retina;    -   imaging said retina with said one or more cameras; and    -   estimating a location of a first feature of said eye based on        one or more images produced by said one or more cameras.

Example 47: The method of Example 46, wherein said location of saidfirst feature of said eye comprises a location in 3D space.

Example 48: The method of Example 46 or 47, wherein said location ofsaid first feature of said eye is not a feature of said retina.

Example 49: The method of any of Example 46-48, further comprisingestimating a location of a second feature of said eye based on saidlocation of said first feature of said eye.

Example 50: The method of Example 49, wherein said location of saidsecond feature of said eye comprises a location in 3D space.

Example 51: The method of any of Examples 49 or 50, wherein saidlocation of said second feature of said eye is not a feature of saidretina.

Example 52: The method of any of Examples 46-51, wherein said locationof said first feature comprises the location of the said pupil.

Example 53: The method of any of Example 46-52, wherein said location ofsaid first feature comprises the location of the center of said pupil.

Example 54: The method of any of Example 49-53, wherein said location ofsaid second feature comprises the location of the eyeball center orcenter of rotation of the eye.

Other Considerations

In the foregoing specification, the invention has been described withreference to specific embodiments thereof. It will, however, be evidentthat various modifications and changes may be made thereto withoutdeparting from the broader spirit and scope of the invention. Thespecification and drawings are, accordingly, to be regarded in anillustrative rather than restrictive sense.

Indeed, it will be appreciated that the systems and methods of thedisclosure each have several innovative aspects, no single one of whichis solely responsible or required for the desirable attributes disclosedherein. The various features and processes described above may be usedindependently of one another, or may be combined in various ways. Allpossible combinations and subcombinations are intended to fall withinthe scope of this disclosure.

Certain features that are described in this specification in the contextof separate embodiments also may be implemented in combination in asingle embodiment. Conversely, various features that are described inthe context of a single embodiment also may be implemented in multipleembodiments separately or in any suitable subcombination. Moreover,although features may be described above as acting in certaincombinations and even initially exampled as such, one or more featuresfrom an exampled combination may in some cases be excised from thecombination, and the exampled combination may be directed to asubcombination or variation of a subcombination. No single feature orgroup of features is necessary or indispensable to each and everyembodiment.

Each of the processes, methods, and algorithms described herein and/ordepicted in the attached figures may be embodied in, and fully orpartially automated by, code modules executed by one or more physicalcomputing systems, hardware computer processors, application-specificcircuitry, and/or electronic hardware configured to execute specific andparticular computer instructions. For example, computing systems caninclude general purpose computers (e.g., servers) programmed withspecific computer instructions or special purpose computers, specialpurpose circuitry, and so forth. A code module may be compiled andlinked into an executable program, installed in a dynamic link library,or may be written in an interpreted programming language. In someimplementations, particular operations and methods may be performed bycircuitry that is specific to a given function.

Further, certain implementations of the functionality of the presentdisclosure are sufficiently mathematically, computationally, ortechnically complex that application-specific hardware or one or morephysical computing devices (utilizing appropriate specialized executableinstructions) may be necessary to perform the functionality, forexample, due to the volume or complexity of the calculations involved orto provide results substantially in real-time. For example, animationsor video may include many frames, with each frame having millions ofpixels, and specifically programmed computer hardware is necessary toprocess the video data to provide a desired image processing task orapplication in a commercially reasonable amount of time.

Various embodiments of the present disclosure may be a system, a method,and/or a computer program product at any possible technical detail levelof integration. The computer program product may include a computerreadable storage medium (or mediums) having computer readable programinstructions thereon for causing a processor to carry out aspects of thepresent disclosure.

For example, the functionality described herein may be performed assoftware instructions are executed by, and/or in response to softwareinstructions being executed by, one or more hardware processors and/orany other suitable computing devices. The software instructions and/orother executable code may be read from a computer readable storagemedium (or mediums).

The computer readable storage medium can be a tangible device that canretain and store data and/or instructions for use by an instructionexecution device. The computer readable storage medium may be, forexample, but is not limited to, an electronic storage device (includingany volatile and/or non-volatile electronic storage devices), a magneticstorage device, an optical storage device, an electromagnetic storagedevice, a semiconductor storage device, or any suitable combination ofthe foregoing. A non-exhaustive list of more specific examples of thecomputer readable storage medium includes the following: a portablecomputer diskette, a hard disk, a solid state drive, a random accessmemory (RAM), a read-only memory (ROM), an erasable programmableread-only memory (EPROM or Flash memory), a static random access memory(SRAM), a portable compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), a digitalversatile disk (DVD), a memory stick, a floppy disk, a mechanicallyencoded device such as punch-cards or raised structures in a groovehaving instructions recorded thereon, and any suitable combination ofthe foregoing. A computer readable storage medium, as used herein, isnot to be construed as being transitory signals per se, such as radiowaves or other freely propagating electromagnetic waves, electromagneticwaves propagating through a waveguide or other transmission media (e.g.,light pulses passing through a fiber-optic cable), or electrical signalstransmitted through a wire.

Computer readable program instructions described herein can bedownloaded to respective computing/processing devices from a computerreadable storage medium or to an external computer or external storagedevice via a network, for example, the Internet, a local area network, awide area network and/or a wireless network. The network may comprisecopper transmission cables, optical transmission fibers, wirelesstransmission, routers, firewalls, switches, gateway computers and/oredge servers. A network adapter card or network interface in eachcomputing/processing device receives computer readable programinstructions from the network and forwards the computer readable programinstructions for storage in a computer readable storage medium withinthe respective computing/processing device.

Computer readable program instructions (as also referred to herein as,for example, “code,” “instructions,” “module,” “application,” “softwareapplication,” and/or the like) for carrying out operations of thepresent disclosure may be assembler instructions,instruction-set-architecture (ISA) instructions, machine instructions,machine dependent instructions, microcode, firmware instructions,state-setting data, configuration data for integrated circuitry, oreither source code or object code written in any combination of one ormore programming languages, including an object oriented programminglanguage such as Java, C++, or the like, and procedural programminglanguages, such as the “C” programming language or similar programminglanguages. Computer readable program instructions may be callable fromother instructions or from itself, and/or may be invoked in response todetected events or interrupts. Computer readable program instructionsconfigured for execution on computing devices may be provided on acomputer readable storage medium, and/or as a digital download (and maybe originally stored in a compressed or installable format that requiresinstallation, decompression or decryption prior to execution) that maythen be stored on a computer readable storage medium. Such computerreadable program instructions may be stored, partially or fully, on amemory device (e.g., a computer readable storage medium) of theexecuting computing device, for execution by the computing device. Thecomputer readable program instructions may execute entirely on a user'scomputer (e.g., the executing computing device), partly on the user'scomputer, as a stand-alone software package, partly on the user'scomputer and partly on a remote computer or entirely on the remotecomputer or server. In the latter scenario, the remote computer may beconnected to the user's computer through any type of network, includinga local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN), or theconnection may be made to an external computer (for example, through theInternet using an Internet Service Provider). In some embodiments,electronic circuitry including, for example, programmable logiccircuitry, field-programmable gate arrays (FPGA), or programmable logicarrays (PLA) may execute the computer readable program instructions byutilizing state information of the computer readable programinstructions to personalize the electronic circuitry, in order toperform aspects of the present disclosure.

Aspects of the present disclosure are described herein with reference toflowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus(systems), and computer program products according to embodiments of thedisclosure. It will be understood that each block of the flowchartillustrations and/or block diagrams, and combinations of blocks in theflowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, can be implemented bycomputer readable program instructions.

These computer readable program instructions may be provided to aprocessor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, orother programmable data processing apparatus to produce a machine, suchthat the instructions, which execute via the processor of the computeror other programmable data processing apparatus, create means forimplementing the functions/acts specified in the flowchart and/or blockdiagram block or blocks. These computer readable program instructionsmay also be stored in a computer readable storage medium that can directa computer, a programmable data processing apparatus, and/or otherdevices to function in a particular manner, such that the computerreadable storage medium having instructions stored therein comprises anarticle of manufacture including instructions which implement aspects ofthe function/act specified in the flowchart(s) and/or block diagram(s)block or blocks.

The computer readable program instructions may also be loaded onto acomputer, other programmable data processing apparatus, or other deviceto cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer,other programmable apparatus or other device to produce a computerimplemented process, such that the instructions which execute on thecomputer, other programmable apparatus, or other device implement thefunctions/acts specified in the flowchart and/or block diagram block orblocks. For example, the instructions may initially be carried on amagnetic disk or solid state drive of a remote computer. The remotecomputer may load the instructions and/or modules into its dynamicmemory and send the instructions over a telephone, cable, or opticalline using a modem. A modem local to a server computing system mayreceive the data on the telephone/cable/optical line and use a converterdevice including the appropriate circuitry to place the data on a bus.The bus may carry the data to a memory, from which a processor mayretrieve and execute the instructions. The instructions received by thememory may optionally be stored on a storage device (e.g., a solid statedrive) either before or after execution by the computer processor.

The flowchart and block diagrams in the Figures illustrate thearchitecture, functionality, and operation of possible implementationsof systems, methods, and computer program products according to variousembodiments of the present disclosure. In this regard, each block in theflowchart or block diagrams may represent a module, segment, or portionof instructions, which comprises one or more executable instructions forimplementing the specified logical function(s). In some alternativeimplementations, the functions noted in the blocks may occur out of theorder noted in the Figures. For example, two blocks shown in successionmay, in fact, be executed substantially concurrently, or the blocks maysometimes be executed in the reverse order, depending upon thefunctionality involved. In addition, certain blocks may be omitted insome implementations. The methods and processes described herein arealso not limited to any particular sequence, and the blocks or statesrelating thereto can be performed in other sequences that areappropriate.

It will also be noted that each block of the block diagrams and/orflowchart illustration, and combinations of blocks in the block diagramsand/or flowchart illustration, can be implemented by special purposehardware-based systems that perform the specified functions or acts orcarry out combinations of special purpose hardware and computerinstructions. For example, any of the processes, methods, algorithms,elements, blocks, applications, or other functionality (or portions offunctionality) described in the preceding sections may be embodied in,and/or fully or partially automated via, electronic hardware suchapplication-specific processors (e.g., application-specific integratedcircuits (ASICs)), programmable processors (e.g., field programmablegate arrays (FPGAs)), application-specific circuitry, and/or the like(any of which may also combine custom hard-wired logic, logic circuits,ASICs, FPGAs, etc. with custom programming/execution of softwareinstructions to accomplish the techniques).

Any of the above-mentioned processors, and/or devices incorporating anyof the above-mentioned processors, may be referred to herein as, forexample, “computers,” “computer devices,” “computing devices,” “hardwarecomputing devices,” “hardware processors,” “processing units,” and/orthe like. Computing devices of the above-embodiments may generally (butnot necessarily) be controlled and/or coordinated by operating systemsoftware, such as Mac OS, iOS, Android, Chrome OS, Windows OS (e.g.,Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, WindowsServer, etc.), Windows CE, Unix, Linux, SunOS, Solaris, Blackberry OS,VxWorks, or other suitable operating systems. In other embodiments, thecomputing devices may be controlled by a proprietary operating system.Conventional operating systems control and schedule computer processesfor execution, perform memory management, provide file system,networking, I/O services, and provide a user interface functionality,such as a graphical user interface (“GUI”), among other things.

As described above, in various embodiments certain functionality may beaccessible by a user through a web-based viewer (such as a web browser),or other suitable software program). In such implementations, the userinterface may be generated by a server computing system and transmittedto a web browser of the user (e.g., running on the user's computingsystem). Alternatively, data (e.g., user interface data) necessary forgenerating the user interface may be provided by the server computingsystem to the browser, where the user interface may be generated (e.g.,the user interface data may be executed by a browser accessing a webservice and may be configured to render the user interfaces based on theuser interface data). The user may then interact with the user interfacethrough the web-browser. User interfaces of certain implementations maybe accessible through one or more dedicated software applications. Incertain embodiments, one or more of the computing devices and/or systemsof the disclosure may include mobile computing devices, and userinterfaces may be accessible through such mobile computing devices (forexample, smartphones and/or tablets).

These computer programs, which may also be referred to as programs,software, software applications, applications, components, or code, mayinclude machine instructions for a programmable controller, processor,microprocessor or other computing or computerized architecture, and maybe implemented in a high-level procedural language, an object-orientedprogramming language, a functional programming language, a logicalprogramming language, and/or in assembly/machine language. As usedherein, the term “machine-readable medium” refers to any computerprogram product, apparatus and/or device, such as for example magneticdiscs, optical disks, memory, and Programmable Logic Devices (PLDs),used to provide machine instructions and/or data to a programmableprocessor, including a machine-readable medium that receives machineinstructions as a machine-readable signal. The term “machine-readablesignal” refers to any signal used to provide machine instructions and/ordata to a programmable processor. The machine-readable medium may storesuch machine instructions non-transitorily, such as for example as woulda non-transient solid-state memory or a magnetic hard drive or anyequivalent storage medium. The machine-readable medium may alternativelyor additionally store such machine instructions in a transient manner,such as for example as would a processor cache or other random accessmemory associated with one or more physical processor cores.

Many variations and modifications may be made to the above-describedembodiments, the elements of which are to be understood as being amongother acceptable examples. All such modifications and variations areintended to be included herein within the scope of this disclosure. Theforegoing description details certain embodiments. It will beappreciated, however, that no matter how detailed the foregoing appearsin text, the systems and methods can be practiced in many ways. As isalso stated above, it should be noted that the use of particularterminology when describing certain features or aspects of the systemsand methods should not be taken to imply that the terminology is beingre-defined herein to be restricted to including any specificcharacteristics of the features or aspects of the systems and methodswith which that terminology is associated.

It will be appreciated that conditional language used herein, such as,among others, “can,” “could,” “might,” “may,” “e.g.,” and the like,unless specifically stated otherwise, or otherwise understood within thecontext as used, is generally intended to convey that certainembodiments include, while other embodiments do not include, certainfeatures, elements and/or steps. Thus, such conditional language is notgenerally intended to imply that features, elements and/or steps are inany way required for one or more embodiments or that one or moreembodiments necessarily include logic for deciding, with or withoutauthor input or prompting, whether these features, elements and/or stepsare included or are to be performed in any particular embodiment. Theterms “comprising,” “including,” “having,” and the like are synonymousand are used inclusively, in an open-ended fashion, and do not excludeadditional elements, features, acts, operations, and so forth. Also, theterm “or” is used in its inclusive sense (and not in its exclusivesense) so that when used, for example, to connect a list of elements,the term “or” means one, some, or all of the elements in the list. Inaddition, the articles “a,” “an,” and “the” as used in this applicationand the appended examples are to be construed to mean “one or more” or“at least one” unless specified otherwise. Similarly, while operationsmay be depicted in the drawings in a particular order, it is to berecognized that such operations need not be performed in the particularorder shown or in sequential order, or that all illustrated operationsbe performed, to achieve desirable results. Further, the drawings mayschematically depict one more example processes in the form of aflowchart. However, other operations that are not depicted may beincorporated in the example methods and processes that are schematicallyillustrated. For example, one or more additional operations may beperformed before, after, simultaneously, or between any of theillustrated operations. Additionally, the operations may be rearrangedor reordered in other embodiments. In certain circumstances,multitasking and parallel processing may be advantageous. Moreover, theseparation of various system components in the embodiments describedabove should not be understood as requiring such separation in allembodiments, and it should be understood that the described programcomponents and systems may generally be integrated together in a singlesoftware product or packaged into multiple software products.Additionally, other embodiments are within the scope of the followingexamples. In some cases, the actions recited in the examples may beperformed in a different order and still achieve desirable results.

Accordingly, the disclosure are not intended to be limited to theembodiments shown herein, but are to be accorded the widest scopeconsistent with this disclosure, the principles and the novel featuresdisclosed herein. A variety of example systems and methods are providedbelow.

What is claimed:
 1. A display system comprising: a frame configured tobe wearable on a head of a user; at least one image projector supportedby the frame, the at least one image projector configured to projectaugmented reality image content; an eyepiece supported by the frame, theeyepiece configured to receive the augmented reality image content fromthe at least one image projector and direct the augmented reality imagecontent to an eye of the user; at least one light source configured todirect light to the eye; at least one reflective element disposed on atleast one of the frame or the eyepiece, wherein the at least onereflective element comprises a segmented optical element; at least onecamera supported by the frame on at least one temple side of the head ofthe user, the at least one camera arranged to receive a portion of thelight that is reflected from the eye to the at least one reflectiveelement and that is reflected from the at least one reflective elementto the at least one camera to form at least one image of the eye that iscaptured by the at least one camera; processing electronics incommunication with the at least one image projector; and memory storinginstructions that, when executed by the processing electronics, causethe processing electronics to performing operations comprising receivingthe at least one image of the eye that is captured by the at least onecamera, estimating a location of at least one feature of the eye basedon the at least one image, wherein the at least one feature includes aretina of the eye, and determining a gaze direction of the eye based onassessing where at least part of the retina captured by the at least onecamera fits within a retinal map, wherein determining the gaze directioncomprises defining a bounding region within a first image of the atleast one image, wherein the first image contains the at least onefeature, identifying a center of mass of the bounding region,determining a 3D position of a pupil center and an eye ball center basedon the center of mass of the bounding region, and determining the gazedirection based on a coordinate system having an origin defined as alocation of the eye ball center, wherein the gaze direction passesthrough the pupil center.
 2. The display system of claim 1, wherein theat least one light source includes at least one vertical-cavitysurface-emitting laser (VCSEL).
 3. The display system of claim 1,wherein at least a portion of the eyepiece is transparent to visiblelight, to provide the user a view of the environment in front of theuser while the frame is being worn by the user.
 4. The display system ofclaim 1, wherein the at least one reflective element is transparent tovisible light.
 5. The display system of claim 1, wherein the at leastone light source comprises an infrared light source that outputs more ofthe light as infrared light than visible light.
 6. The display system ofclaim 1, wherein the at least one light source is supported by the frameon at least one temple side of the head of the user.
 7. The displaysystem of claim 1, wherein the at least one light source is mounted onthe eyepiece.
 8. The display system of claim 1, wherein the at least onelight source is mounted on a side of the eyepiece that is proximal tothe eye.
 9. The display system of claim 1, wherein the at least onelight source is mounted on a side of the eyepiece that is distal to theeye.
 10. The display system of claim 1, wherein the at least one lightsource is integrated with the at least one camera.
 11. The displaysystem of claim 1, wherein the at least one light source is configuredto output polarized light.
 12. The display system of claim 1, furthercomprising electronics configured to modulate the at least one lightsource to reduce speckle.
 13. The display system of claim 1, furthercomprising at least one diffractive optical element having a chromaticdispersion that counters at least a portion of the chromatic aberrationintroduced by the at least one reflective element.
 14. The displaysystem of claim 1, wherein the eyepiece is configured to direct theaugmented reality image content to the eye of the user such that theaugmented reality image content appears to originate from differentdepths.
 15. The display system of claim 1, wherein the eyepiececomprises one or more waveguides.
 16. The display system of claim 1,wherein the location of the at least one feature is estimated inthree-dimensional space.
 17. The display system of claim 1, wherein theat least one feature includes one or more of a pupil of the eye.
 18. Thedisplay system of claim 1, wherein the location is a center of a pupilof the eye.
 19. The display system of claim 1, wherein the operationsfurther comprise producing the retinal map based on a plurality ofretinal images obtained for different eye gazes.
 20. The display systemof claim 1, wherein the retinal map is produced in part by displaying aplurality of targets to the user's eye, wherein the targets are locatedat different positions to cause the user's eye to alter gaze direction,wherein different gaze directions of the user's eye are correlated toimages of the retina obtained by the at least one camera at thedifferent gaze directions, respectively.
 21. The display system of claim1, wherein the operations further comprises producing a gaze matrixbased on correlating images of the user's retina with gaze directions ofthe user's eye.
 22. The display system of claim 1, wherein the locationof the at least one feature is estimated based on at least a first imageof the retina and a second image of the retina captured by the at leastone camera, wherein the first image of the retina and the second imageof the retina are obtained at different perspectives.
 23. The displaysystem of claim 1, wherein the at least one camera comprises a firstcamera and a second camera, wherein the location of the at least onefeature is estimated based on at least a first image and a second imageof the retina captured by the first camera and the second camera,respectively.
 24. The display system of claim 1, wherein the at leastone camera comprises a first camera and a second camera, wherein thelocation of the at least one feature is estimated based on a pluralityof first images of the retina captured by the first camera and aplurality of second images of the retina captured by the second camera.25. The display system of claim 1, wherein the location of the at leastone feature is estimated based on a determination of a location of bloodvessels of the retina.
 26. The display system of claim 25, wherein thelocation of the at least one feature is estimated based on adetermination of the location of the blood vessels of the retinarelative to a reference location.
 27. The display system of claim 1,wherein the location of the at least one feature is based on adetermination of a location of a spot in the image of the eye capturedby the at least one camera.
 28. The display system of claim 1, whereinthe operations further comprise determining a center of mass or centroidof the spot in the image of the eye captured by the at least one camera.29. The display system of claim 1, wherein the segmented optical elementcomprises a segmented diffractive or holographic optical element. 30.The display system of claim 1, wherein the segmented optical elementcomprises different reflective or diffractive segments arranged tocollect light from different directions and direct the collected lightto the at least one camera.